Garmin | G500 | Garmin G500 G500/G600 Pilot's Guide

Garmin G500 G500/G600 Pilot's Guide
G500/G600
Pilot’s
Guide
© 2008-2018
Garmin International, Inc., or its subsidiaries
All rights reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written
permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the
complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution
of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
This manual reflects the operation of system software v7.30. Some differences in operation may be
observed when comparing the information in this manual to later software versions.
SkyWatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries.
GDU™, SVT™, G500, and G600 are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks
may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
© 2018 SiriusXM Radio Inc., Sirius, XM, and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. Iridium® is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications, Inc. Canadian radar data is
provided by Environment Canada. United States radar data provided by NOAA. European radar data
collected and provided by Meteo France. All other marks and logos are property of their respective
owners. All rights reserved.
© 2018 SD® is a registered trademark of SD-3C, LLC. All rights reserved.
Visit flyGarmin.com for aviation product support.
URL: https://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/support/
Visit Garmin’s website for aviation limited warranty information.
URL: https://www.garmin.com/en-US/legal/aviation-limited-warranty
August 2018
Printed in the U.S.A.
Software License Agreement
Foreward
AOPA Airport Directory
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
AOPA MEMBERSHIP PUBLICATIONS, INC. AND ITS RELATED ORGANIZATIONS (HEREINAFTER
COLLECTIVELY “AOPA”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, WITH RESPECT TO THE AOPA
INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS DATA, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND AOPA DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE
ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING ITS ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL AOPA BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE
OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF AOPA OR AN AOPA AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. USER AGREES NOT TO SUE AOPA AND, TO
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS AOPA FROM ANY
CAUSES OF ACTION, CLAIMS OR LOSSES RELATED TO ANY ACTUAL OR ALLEGED INACCURACIES
IN THE INFORMATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Sec 1
System
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN (“THE
GARMIN PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its
subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a limited license to use the software embedded in the Garmin Product
(the “Software”) in binary executable form in the normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership
rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party
providers. You acknowledge that the Software is the property of Garmin and/or its third-party providers
and is protected under the United States of America copyright laws and international copyright treaties.
You further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable trade
secrets of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and that the Software in source code form remains a
valuable trade secret of Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile,
disassemble, modify, reverse assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the Software
or any part thereof or create any derivative works based on the Software. You agree not to export or reexport the Software to any country in violation of the export control laws of the United States of America.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
i
Sec 1
System
Foreword
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole
source of information for maintaining separation from terrain and
obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle information from third
party sources and cannot independently verify the accuracy of the
information.
Sec 2
PFD
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs
for verification of displayed aeronautical information. Displayed
aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
Sec 3
MFD
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate
minimum clearance altitudes. The displayed MSAs are only advisory in
nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and
terrain avoidance information.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with Air Traffic
Control altitude requirements. The primary barometric altimeter must
be used for compliance with all Air Traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle
avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance situational awareness.
Sec 7
Symbols
WARNING: Do not rely solely on the GDU 620 for cross-checking all
redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit. Although
unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a
fault indication shown by the GDU 620.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
WARNING: Always use pressure altitude displayed by the GDU 620
PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft for vertical navigation. GPS
altitude is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could vary
significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters or other
altimeters in aircraft.
Index
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used
in the G500/G600 systems must be updated regularly in order to ensure
that the information remains current. Pilots using an outdated database
do so entirely at their own risk.
ii
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreward
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data)
as the sole means of navigation. Basemap data is intended only to
supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be
considered only an aid to enhance situational awareness.
Appendix A
Index
iii
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 7
Symbols
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection
system display as the sole basis for hazardous weather avoidance.
Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display
inaccurate or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the
lightning detection system manufacturer for detailed information about
the system.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information. Always confirm TFR
information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air
Traffic Control.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information
to accurately depict all of the traffic within range of the aircraft. Due to
lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not
represented on the display.
Sec 3
MFD
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Sec 2
PFD
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
Sec 1
System
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for
collision avoidance maneuvering. The traffic system does not provide
collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and
avoid other aircraft.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
WARNING: Always obtain qualified instruction prior to operational
use of this equipment. During flight operations, carefully compare
indications from the GDU 620 to all available navigation sources,
including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts,
etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before
continuing navigation.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
WARNING: Do not exceed 200 degrees per second in pitch or roll
with a GRS 77/GDC 74 installation. This may invalidate AHRS attitude
provided to the GDU 620. Exceeding 450 KIAS may invalidate ADC
information provided to the GDU 620. With a GSU 75/GRS 79/
GDC 72 installation, exceeding 225 degrees per second in pitch or roll
may invalidate AHRS attitude provided to the GDU 620. Exceeding 435
KIAS may invalidate ADC information provided to the GDU 620.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
WARNING: Do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and heading
indications in geographic areas where variation in the earth’s magnetic
field exists. This includes: North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes;
south of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; north of 65° North latitude
between longitude 75° West and 120° West (Northern Canada); North
of 70° North latitude and between longitude 85° East and 114° East
(Northern Russia); south of 55° South latitude between longitude 120°
East and 165° East (region South of Australia and New Zealand).
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
CAUTION: Ensure that any unit repairs are made by an authorized
Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void
both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the aircraft.
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners
containing ammonia. They will harm the anti-reflective coating.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning
System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The
GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as
a precision electronic NAVAID. Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information
presented by the system can be misused or misinterpreted and become
unsafe.
Index
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars
can cause an intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the
aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 feet away
from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
iv
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth
defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in
accordance with California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions
or would like additional information, please refer to our website at
www.garmin.com/prop65.
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater
than 75° North or 60° South.
Sec 1
System
NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Foreward
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including
screen images of the system panel and displays, are subject to change and
may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases. Depictions
of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi, FliteCharts, or Chartview functions as the
basis for ground maneuvering. SafeTaxi, FliteCharts, and Chartview
functions have not been qualified to be used as an airport moving map
display (AMMD). SafeTaxi, FliteCharts, and Chartview are intended
to improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations and
should only be used by the flight crew to orient themselves on the
airport surface.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
v
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin
database-dependent avionics of the following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory
and advisory guidance and information related to the use of databases
in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases obtained from Garmin or
Jeppesen that have a Type 2 LOA from the FAA are assured compliance
with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is
available for each applicable database and can be viewed at
flyGarmin.com by selecting “Aviation Database Declarations.”
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin
equipment is required for compliance with established FAA regulatory
guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all
terminal procedures that may be presented by the system. It is the
pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established AFM(S)
and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the
aircraft, and installed equipment.
vi
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Record of Revisions
03/2015 Update reflects software v7.10 upgrade.
G
02/2015 Update reflects software v7.00 upgrade.
F
10/2012 Update reflects software v6.11 upgrade.
E
08/2011 Update reflects software v6.00 uprade.
D
11/2010 Update reflects software v4.00 and v5.00 upgrades.
C
04/2009 Update reflects software v3.0 upgrade.
B
07/2008 Update includes various content edits.
A
06/2008 Product release.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
H
Sec 3
MFD
11/2016 Update reflects software v7.12 upgrade.
Sec 2
PFD
J
Sec 1
System
Date
Description
08/2018 Update reflects software v7.30 upgrade.
Foreward
Revision
K
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Change Description
1-23
2-7
2-15
2-17
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Index
2-19
Appendix A
Updated figure 1-23 “System Setup Page” in section 1.4.4 “System
Settings.”
Added CDI/VDI Preview category to table 1-4 “Display Units Settings
(System Setup Page)” in section 1.4.4 “System Settings.”
Added figure 2-9 “Selected Airspeed Bug” and description to section
2.2 “Airspeed Indicator.”
Added Altitude alerter description and VNAV Altitude Constraint to
figure 2-21 “Altimeter” in section 2.4.1 “Setting the Altitude Bug and
Alerter.”
Added section 2.4.3 “VNAV Altitude Constraints (Software v7.30 or
Later).”
Updated Minimums box cyan text description in section 2.4.5
“Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting.”
Sec 8
Glossary
1-22
Sec 7
Symbols
Description
Added section 1.1.2.9“GFC 500/600” section.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Page
1-13
vii
Foreword
2-21
2-25
Sec 1
System
2-28
2-29
Sec 2
PFD
3-16
3-32
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
4-52
Added figure 2-36 “Vertical Deviation Indicator (VNAV)” and
description to section 2.7.4 “Vertical Deviation Indicator.”
Added figure 2-37 “VDI Preview” and description to section 2.7.4
“Vertical Deviation Indicator.”
Updated description of Selected Altitude Range Arc in section 3.1.10
“Map Setup.”
Added section 3.2.1.5 “CDI/VDI Preview.”
5-36
Added description of ADS-B Traffic map page display orientation to
section 4.6.4.2 “Status.”
Added section 5.4.7.1 “GFC 500/600.”
5-38
Added section 5.4.8 “Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP).”
6-6
Added “ESP Fail” Alert message to table 6-1 “Alert Messages.”
6-11
Added “SD Card 1” and “SD Card 2” alert messages to table 6-1
“Alert Messages.”
Added “TAS/TCAS has failed” and “Traffic device is inoperative or
connection to GDU is lost” to “TRAFFIC” Alert Message in table 6-1
“Alert Messages.”
Added “USP” alert message to table 6-1 “Alert Messages.”
6-13
7-1
Added “User Waypoint” and “New User Airport” symbols to table 7-1
“Map Page Symbols.”
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Added Required Vertical Speed to fIgure 2-26 “Vertical Speed Tape and
Window” in section 2.5 “Vertical Speed Indicator.”
Added section 2.7.1 “CDI Preview.”
viii
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
1
System Overview..................................................................................1-1
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
ix
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 5
Additional
Features
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2.1 PFD Soft Keys......................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Airspeed Indicator.................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.1
Markings................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.2
Reference Speeds................................................................... 2-9
2.3 Attitude Indicator................................................................................. 2-10
2.3.1
Extreme Attitude.................................................................. 2-12
2.4 Altimeter............................................................................................. 2-14
2.4.1
Setting the Altitude Bug and Alerter...................................... 2-15
2.4.2
Altitude Alerting................................................................... 2-16
2.4.3
VNAV Altitude Constraints (Software v7.30 or Later)...........2-17
2.4.4
Changing Barometric Setting................................................ 2-18
2.4.5
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting.............. 2-19
2.5 Vertical Speed Indicator........................................................................ 2-21
2.6 Horizontal Situation Indicator............................................................... 2-22
2.6.1
Setting the Heading Bug....................................................... 2-23
2.6.2
Turn Rate Indicator............................................................... 2-24
2.7 Course Deviation Indicator................................................................... 2-25
2.7.1
CDI Preview......................................................................... 2-25
2.7.2
Changing CDI Sources.......................................................... 2-26
2.7.3
Changing CDI Course........................................................... 2-27
2.7.4
Vertical Deviation Indicator................................................... 2-27
Sec 3
MFD
Primary Flight Display...........................................................................2-1
Sec 2
PFD
2
Sec 1
System
1.1 System Description................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1
Standard System Line Replaceable Units................................. 1-3
1.1.2
Optional Line Replaceable Units........................................... 1-10
1.2 System Power Up................................................................................. 1-14
1.3 International Geomagnetic Reference Field........................................... 1-16
1.4 System Operation................................................................................. 1-17
1.4.1
Pilot Controls....................................................................... 1-17
1.4.2
Using the Soft Key Controls.................................................. 1-21
1.4.3
Using the Page Menus.......................................................... 1-21
1.4.4
System Settings.................................................................... 1-22
1.4.5
Display Backlighting............................................................. 1-25
Foreward
Contents
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
2.7.5
Auto-Slewing....................................................................... 2-29
2.8 Supplemental Flight Data..................................................................... 2-32
2.8.1
Bearing Pointers................................................................... 2-32
2.8.2
Temperature Display............................................................. 2-33
2.8.3
Wind Vectors........................................................................ 2-34
2.8.4
DME Indication.................................................................... 2-34
2.8.5
Marker Beacon Annunciations.............................................. 2-35
2.8.6
Miscompare Annunciations................................................... 2-35
2.9 Radar Altimeter.................................................................................... 2-37
2.10 Fast/Slow Indication............................................................................. 2-39
2.11 PFD Units............................................................................................ 2-39
3
Multi-Function Display..........................................................................3-1
3.1 Navigation Map Pages........................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1
Default Navigation Map Page................................................. 3-3
3.1.2
Map Overlay Icons.................................................................. 3-3
3.1.3
Selecting Page Options........................................................... 3-4
3.1.4
Changing the Navigation Map Range..................................... 3-4
3.1.5
Decluttering Map Pages.......................................................... 3-4
3.1.6
Panning................................................................................. 3-6
3.1.7
Selecting Items on the Map.................................................... 3-7
3.1.8
Measuring Distances.............................................................. 3-7
3.1.9
Customizing Navigation Map Pages........................................ 3-8
3.1.10
Map Setup............................................................................. 3-8
3.1.11
Split Screen (Optional).......................................................... 3-26
3.2 Aux Mode Pages.................................................................................. 3-27
3.2.1
System Settings.................................................................... 3-27
3.2.2
SiriusXM Information (Optional)............................................ 3-39
3.2.3
SiriusXM Entertainment Radio (Optional).............................. 3-40
3.2.4
System Status....................................................................... 3-41
3.2.5
ADS-B/FIS-B Status (Optional)............................................... 3-48
3.2.6
External Video (Optional)...................................................... 3-49
3.2.7
Position Reporting (Optional)................................................ 3-54
3.2.8
Iridium Phone Operation (Optional)....................................... 3-57
3.3 Flight Plan Pages................................................................................. 3-65
3.3.1
Active Flight Plan Page......................................................... 3-65
3.3.2
Waypoint Information Page.................................................. 3-68
3.3.3
Charts Page (Optional)......................................................... 3-75
x
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4
Hazard Avoidance.................................................................................4-1
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
xi
Sec 2
PFD
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 1
System
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreward
4.1 Terrain Configurations............................................................................ 4-2
4.1.1
Terrain System Self-Test.......................................................... 4-3
4.2 Terrain Proximity.................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.1
Terrain Proximity Limitations................................................... 4-5
4.2.2
Terrain System Status.............................................................. 4-5
4.2.3
Displaying Terrain Proximity.................................................... 4-6
4.2.4
Terrain Proximity Symbols..................................................... 4-10
4.3 Terrain Awareness and Warning System (Optional)................................ 4-12
4.3.1
TAWS-B Requirements.......................................................... 4-12
4.3.2
TAWS-B Limitations.............................................................. 4-12
4.3.3
TAWS Self-Test..................................................................... 4-13
4.3.4
TAWS Page.......................................................................... 4-14
4.3.5
TAWS Alerts......................................................................... 4-17
4.3.6
TAWS System Status............................................................. 4-25
4.4 External TAWS..................................................................................... 4-26
4.5 Terrain-SVT.......................................................................................... 4-27
4.5.1
Terrain-SVT Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings.............................. 4-28
4.5.2
Terrain-SVT Page Aviation Data............................................. 4-29
4.5.3
Inhibiting/Enabling Terrain-SVT Alerting................................. 4-29
4.5.4
Synthetic Vision Alerts and Annunciations.............................. 4-30
4.6 Traffic Systems..................................................................................... 4-32
4.6.2
TAS/TCAS 1 Traffic (Optional)................................................ 4-34
4.6.3
TIS Traffic (Optional)............................................................. 4-40
4.6.4
ADS-B Traffic (Optional)........................................................ 4-49
4.7 SiriusXM WX Satellite Weather (Optional)............................................. 4-54
4.7.1
Using SiriusXM WX Satellite Weather Products...................... 4-55
Customizing the SiriusXM WX Satellite Weather Map...............4-56
4.7.2
4.7.3
SiriusXM WX Weather Symbols and Product Age................... 4-58
4.7.4
SiriusXM Weather Legends................................................... 4-60
4.7.5
SiriusXM NEXRAD................................................................ 4-61
4.7.6
XM Weather Page Map Orientation....................................... 4-64
4.7.7
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range............................................... 4-65
4.7.8
NEXRAD Legend.................................................................. 4-65
4.7.9
NEXRAD Source................................................................... 4-66
4.7.10
XM Echo Tops...................................................................... 4-67
4.7.11
XM Cloud Tops..................................................................... 4-69
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
4.7.12
XM WX Satellite Lightning.................................................... 4-71
4.7.13
XM SIGMETs and AIRMETs................................................... 4-72
4.7.14
XM PIREPs........................................................................... 4-74
4.7.15
XM METARs......................................................................... 4-75
4.7.16
XM Winds Aloft.................................................................... 4-77
4.7.17
XM Surface Analysis and City Forecast.................................. 4-79
4.7.18
XM County Warnings............................................................ 4-81
4.7.20
XM Cell Movement............................................................... 4-84
4.7.21
XM AIREPs........................................................................... 4-85
4.7.22
XM Cyclone.......................................................................... 4-87
4.7.23
XM Freezing Level................................................................ 4-88
4.7.24
XM Icing.............................................................................. 4-89
4.7.25
XM Turbulence..................................................................... 4-90
4.8 Weather Radar.................................................................................... 4-91
4.8.1
Garmin Weather Radar Description....................................... 4-91
4.8.2
Radar Signal Reflectivity....................................................... 4-97
4.8.3
Operating Distance............................................................... 4-99
4.8.4
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup..................................................... 4-100
4.8.5
Weather Mapping and Interpretation.................................. 4-101
4.8.6
Radar Operation in Weather Mode...................................... 4-105
4.8.7
Ground Mapping and Interpretation................................... 4-115
4.9 Garmin Connext Satellite Services (Optional)...................................... 4-116
4.9.1
Connext Weather Registration............................................ 4-117
4.9.2
Using Weather Products..................................................... 4-118
4.9.3
Customizing the Weather Map............................................ 4-118
4.9.4
Data Request..................................................................... 4-120
4.9.5
Weather Page Map Orientation........................................... 4-125
4.9.6
Precipitation Data Viewing Range....................................... 4-126
4.9.7
PRECIP Legend................................................................... 4-127
4.9.8
Infrared Satellite Data Viewing Range................................. 4-128
4.9.9
Data Link Lightning Viewing Range..................................... 4-129
4.9.10
SIGMETs and AIRMETs....................................................... 4-130
4.9.11
AIREP/PIREP....................................................................... 4-132
4.9.12
METARs............................................................................. 4-134
4.9.13
Winds Aloft........................................................................ 4-137
4.9.14
TFRs................................................................................... 4-139
4.10 FIS-B Weather (Optional).................................................................... 4-140
xii
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Additional Features (Optional).............................................................5-1
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
xiii
Sec 7
Symbols
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 5
Additional
Features
6.1 Alerts.................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 System Status...................................................................................... 6-15
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Annunciations and Alerts......................................................................6-1
Sec 3
MFD
6
Sec 2
PFD
5.1 FliteCharts and ChartView...................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1
ChartView (Optional).............................................................. 5-3
5.1.2
FliteCharts ............................................................................. 5-4
5.1.3
Determining Chart Database Type, Coverage, and Currency..... 5-5
5.1.4
Selecting a Chart.................................................................... 5-7
5.1.5
Using Charts........................................................................ 5-11
5.2 SafeTaxi .............................................................................................. 5-18
5.2.1
Using SafeTaxi .................................................................... 5-19
5.2.2
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision..................................... 5-21
5.3 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment................................................. 5-22
5.3.1
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services........................... 5-22
5.3.2
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Information..................................... 5-24
5.3.3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment................................. 5-25
5.3.4
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting................... 5-30
5.4 Autopilot Operation............................................................................. 5-31
5.4.1
GAD 43 Attitude.................................................................. 5-31
5.4.2
Heading............................................................................... 5-32
5.4.3
Altitude Capture (Optional Upgrade)..................................... 5-32
5.4.4
Autopilot Navigation............................................................ 5-33
5.4.5
Flight Director Display........................................................... 5-34
5.4.6
Vertical Speed Control.......................................................... 5-35
5.4.7
Autopilot Mode Annunciations............................................. 5-36
5.4.8
Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP™)............................... 5-38
5.5 Synthetic Vision Technology (Optional).................................................. 5-40
5.5.1
SVT Operation...................................................................... 5-41
5.5.2
Activating and Deactivating SVT........................................... 5-42
5.5.3
SVT Features........................................................................ 5-43
Sec 1
System
5
Foreward
4.10.1
NEXRAD Abnormalities....................................................... 4-141
4.10.2
NEXRAD Limitations........................................................... 4-141
4.10.3
NEXRAD Intensity............................................................... 4-141
4.10.4
NEXRAD............................................................................ 4-142
4.10.5
NEXRAD Weather Setup..................................................... 4-142
4.11 StormScope....................................................................................... 4-157
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Symbols.................................................................................................7-1
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
Map Page Symbols................................................................................. 7-1
SafeTaxi Symbols.................................................................................... 7-2
Traffic Symbols....................................................................................... 7-2
Basemap Symbols.................................................................................. 7-4
Map Tool Bar Symbols............................................................................ 7-5
Ownship Symbols................................................................................... 7-6
Miscellaneous Symbols........................................................................... 7-7
8 Glossary................................................................................................8-1
Appendix A.................................................................................................. A-1
A1 SD Card Use and Databases...................................................................A-1
A.1.1
Aviation Databases................................................................A-3
A.1.2
Garmin Databases..................................................................A-5
Index............................................................................................................ B-1
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
7
xiv
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1
System Description
Foreword
1
Garmin Navigator(s)
Sec 3
MFD
GMU 44 Magnetometer
Sec 2
PFD
In normal operating mode, the Primary Flight Display (PFD) presents
graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, vertical
speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster. The Multi-Function
Display (MFD) normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation
information, as well as supplemental data.
Sec 1
System
This section provides an overview of the G500/G600 Avionics Display System.
The G500/G600 system is an integrated display system that presents primary
flight instrumentation, navigation, and a moving map to the pilot through largeformat displays.
GTP 59 Temperature Probe
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
GDU 620
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
AHRS
Air Data Computer
Sec 7
Symbols
Optional Interfaces
Autopilot
Flight Director
Weather
Data Link
Traffic
Radar
Altimeter
Navigation
Radio
ADF
Weather
Radar
DME
External
Video
GAD 43/43e
Sec 8
Glossary
Audio Panel
Appendix A
Figure 1-1 G500/G600 System (LRU Configuration)
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
1-1
Foreword
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 620 Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi Function Display (MFD)
Air Data Computer (ADC)
Sec 1
System
• Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
• Temperature Probe (such as the GTP 59)
• At least one of the following: GNS 480, CNX80, GNS 400W series,
GNS 500W series, GTN 600 series, GTN 700 series, or a compatible
GPS Navigator
Interfaces to various other aircraft systems and equipment are supported,
including:
• GAD 43/43e Adapter
• GDL 69/69A Satellite Data Link Receiver
• GSR 56 Satellite Data Link Receiver
• Autopilot/Flight Director
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• GDL 88 / GTX 345 ADS-B Transceiver
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• NAV/COM - Garmin GTR/GNC or SL30 NAV/COM radios, or selected
third-party radios
• ADF
• Garmin GTS or GTX traffic awareness systems, or selected third-party
devices
• Garmin GWX radar systems or selected third-party radars
• Radar Altimeter
• Video Sources
• Stormscope
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
• Audio Panel
1-2
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Yes/No
No
Yes
Level C
Optional
Optional
Level B
Standard
Standard
Optional
Standard
Optional
No
No
Optional
Optional
Optional
Sec 3
MFD
Yes
Sec 2
PFD
G600
Yes
Sec 1
System
G500
Yes
Foreword
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
System Feature
Approved for Class 1 Aircraft (typically piston singles
under 6,000 lbs.)
Approved for Class 2 Aircraft (typically piston twins
and turbine aircraft under 6,000 lbs.)
Approved for Class 3 Aircraft (typically piston or
turbine aircraft between 6,000 lbs. and 12,500 lbs.)
Software design assurance level
Garmin SVT Synthetic Vision Technology
GAD 43/43e replaces old A/P gyro attitude with
AHRS references; GAD 43e adds additional
interfaces with other avionics
GWX 68/70 Radar interface (radar LRU sold
separately)
Interface support for other ARINC 708 radars
RVSM capable on select aircraft
Internal TAWS-B terrain alerting
Table 1-1 G500/G600 System Comparison
Standard System Line Replaceable Units
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
This guide covers the operation of the GDU 620 display as integrated in the
G500/G600 system. The G500/G600 Avionics Display System is an avionics
suite designed to replace the traditional flight instrument cluster. The system
combines primary flight instrumentation, navigational information, and a moving
map all displayed on dual color screens. The G500/G600 system is composed
of sub-units or Line Replaceable Units (LRUs). LRUs have a modular design and
can be installed directly behind the instrument panel or in a separate avionics
bay if desired. This design greatly eases troubleshooting and maintenance of the
G500/G600 system. A failure or problem can be isolated to a particular LRU,
which can be replaced quickly and easily. Each LRU has a particular function, or
set of functions, that contributes to the system’s operation.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
1.1.1
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
1-3
GDU 620
The GDU 620 has dual VGA (640 x 480 pixels) 6.5 inch LCD displays. The
left side of the GDU is a PFD and the right side is the MFD. In some models or
installations, the PFD and MFD and their controls are switched to the other side.
The MFD shows a moving map, flight plan, weather, and other supplemental
data. The PFD shows primary flight information, in place of traditional
Pitot-static and gyroscopic systems and also provides an Horizontal Situation
Indicator (HSI) for navigation.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1.1.1.1
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 1-2 GDU 620 PFD and MFD
Index
Figure 1-3 GDU 620 PFD and MFD with PFD on Right
1-4
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
1.1.1.2
Air Data Computer
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The Air Data Computer (ADC) compiles information from the Pitot-static
system and an Outside Air Temperature (OAT) sensor. The ADC provides
pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the
G500/G600 system. The ADC communicates with the GDU 620 and AHRS
using an ARINC 429 digital interface.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 1-4 Air Data Computer
Attitude Heading Reference System
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) unit provides aircraft
attitude information to the G500/G600 display. The unit contains advanced
accelerometers and rate sensors and interfaces with both the ADC and the
GMU 44 magnetometer. The AHRS utilizes GPS data forwarded from the
GDU 620. Attitude and heading information is sent to the GDU 620 using an
ARINC 429 digital interface.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while the AHRS is not operating in normal
mode may degrade AHRS accuracy.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1.1.1.3
Sec 8
Glossary
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
1-5
Index
The International Geomagnetic Reference Field (IGRF) model is contained
in the AHRS and is updated once every five years. The IGRF model is part of
the Navigation Database. At system power-up, the IGRF models in the AHRS
and the Navigation Database are compared. If the IGRF model in the AHRS is
out of date, the user is prompted to update. The prompt will appear after the
G500/G600 start-up screen is acknowledged on the MFD.
Appendix A
Figure 1-5 AHRS
Available
Available
Available
Available
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Available
Unavailable
Air Data
AHRS
Mode
AHRS Outputs
Attitude
Heading
Available/ Normal Available
Available
Unavailable
Available No Mag Available
GPS Track
Unavailable No Air/ Available
GPS Track
No Mag
Available No GPS Available
Available
Available No Mag Available*/ Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Fail
Unavailable Unavailable
Unavailable
Fail
Unavailable Unavailable
* GSU 75 only.
Table 1-2 AHRS Operation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 1
System
Magnetometer
Sec 2
PFD
AHRS Inputs
GPS
Sec 3
MFD
Foreword
Attitude and heading information is displayed on the PFD when the AHRS
receives appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor
inputs.
Heading
Invalid
AHRS No-GPS
Mode
Attitude/Heading
Invalid
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
AHRS Normal
Operation
Index
Appendix A
Figure 1-6 AHRS Operation
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by
message advisory alerts. Refer to section 6 for specific AHRS alert information.
Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and
heading information. This is indicated by red “X” flags over the corresponding
flight instruments.
1-6
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is
receiving valid GPS information. Invalid or unavailable airspeed data, in addition
to complete GPS failure, results in loss of all attitude and heading information.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 1-7 Track Mode shown as Active when Heading Info has failed
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
SVT Is Turned Off
When Heading
Fails
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Track Mode Active
Heading Failed
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
When heading fails, the heading bug is not removed and the GDU continues
driving the autopilot heading error output using track in place of heading.
Sec 3
MFD
Map orientations change from HDG UP to TRACK UP and Map orientations
will change back to HDG up when heading is restored.
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: If the magnetometer fails, the magnetic standby compass and GPS
ground track can be used to keep the aircraft on the desired heading.
Sec 1
System
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude
information and GPS Track information is used. However, the PFD heading
display is flagged as invalid with a red “X” and “TRK” is annunciated to the
right of the Track value in magenta. The Track value color changes from white
to magenta.
Foreword
A maximum of two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information
from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses the remaining GPS input and an
alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
will continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as
magnetometer and airspeed data are available and valid.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
1-7
Sec 1
System
Foreword
NOTE: Fastest AHRS alignment is achieved with the aircraft stationary and
with all AHRS inputs valid (3-D GPS position, magnetometer, and air data).
During initial power up on the ground, no GPS position and/or magnetic
anomalies are common. If the aircraft is taxied prior to AHRS alignment,
alignment may be delayed until after a valid 3-D GPS position is available.
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: During in-flight alignment of the AHRS, minimize aircraft
maneuvering. The AHRS will align with shallow banking and pitch angles
(less than 20 degrees of roll or 5 degrees of pitch). AHRS alignment may
not be possible during more aggressive maneuvers.
When the AHRS signals that a heading is unreliable or in recovery, indications
are displayed on the PFD. These indications are automatically removed once the
heading alignment is corrected.
NOTE: Depending on the AHRS type and the magnitude of the heading error,
the displayed indication may change directly from unreliable to reliable.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Heading Considered Unreliable
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
AHRS Signal
Heading unreliable
Heading recovery in progress
Sec 7
Symbols
Heading reliable
Displayed Indication
The current heading value changes from
white to amber.
The Align Aircraft (ALN) indication
appears to the left of the heading.
Current heading value turns white.
Table 1-3 AHRS Signals and Indications
Current Heading Unreliable
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Heading Recovery in Progress
Index
Align Heading
Figure 1-8 AHRS Heading Indications
1-8
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
1.1.1.4
GMU 44
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The GMU 44 magnetometer senses the earth’s magnetic field. Data is sent
to the AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit
receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with the AHRS using
an RS-485 digital interface.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 1-9 GMU 44 Magnetometer
GTP 59
The GTP 59 temperature probe provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
data to the ADC.
Sec 3
MFD
1.1.1.5
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 1-10 GTP 59 Temperature Probe
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
1.1.1.6
Garmin Navigator Interface
Sec 7
Symbols
The G500/G600 system requires connection to at least one external Garmin
WAAS GPS navigator, such as the 400W/500W series, GTN 6XX/7XX series, or
GNS 480.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
1-9
Foreword
1.1.2
A variety of LRUs are available to expand and enhance the G500/G600
system.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
1.1.2.1
GDL 88
The GDL 88 is a remotely mounted ADS-B transceiver. There are four
models of the GDL 88. Models with a single bottom mounted UAT antenna
meet TSO C154c Class A1S and are available with or without an internal
GPS/SBAS receiver. Models with one top mounted and one bottom mounted
antenna meet TSO C154c Class A1H and are also available with or without an
internal GPS/SBAS receiver.
1.1.2.2
GTX 345
The GTX 345 is a combined mode S/ES transponder and ADS-B transceiver.
Mode S/ES models have an optional internal GPS/SBAS receiver.
The GDU only displays ADS-B information, it does not control the GTX.
1.1.2.3
Weather Radar
The Garmin GWX system, or selected 3rd party radar, provides airborne
weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Optional Line Replaceable Units
Figure 1-11 GWX 68 Weather Radar
1.1.2.4
Stormscope
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed description of
the WX-500 StormScope.
The WX-500 StormScope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive
weather avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with
thunderstorms within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft. The StormScope
measures relative bearing and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical
activity and reports the information to the display.
1-10
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
1.1.2.5
GSR 56
GDL 69/69A
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The GDL 69/69A is a SiriusXM Satellite Radio Data Link Receiver
that receives broadcast weather data. The GDL 69A is the same as the
GDL 69 with the addition of an SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment
receiver. Weather data and control of audio channel and volume is displayed
on the MFD, via a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. The
GDL 69A is also interfaced to an audio panel for distribution of the audio
signal. A subscription to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service is required to
enable the GDL 69/69A capability. Subscription information is available at:
http://www.siriusxm.com/sxmaviation.
Sec 1
System
1.1.2.6
Foreword
The GSR 56 is an Iridium satellite transceiver that supports voice telephone
calls, SMS text messaging, aircraft position reporting, and world wide weather
products.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 1-12 GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Data Link Receiver
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
1-11
GAD 43/43e
The GAD 43 is an adapter that converts AHRS digital pitch, roll, heading
and yaw rate data into analog signals used by autopilot systems. The GAD 43
is installed remotely between the AHRS and an existing autopilot. The analog
signals from the GAD 43 mimic those of spinning-mass gyros that provide data
to the autopilot and allow the gyro to be replaced by the AHRS and GAD 43
combination.
The GAD 43e performs the same functions as the GAD 43, but adds support
for additional interfaces to various aircraft systems. The GAD 43e supports
interfaces to various autopilots (for altitude preselect and vertical speed control),
analog NAV radios, DME, analog radar altimeters, marker beacons, and ADF
receivers.
Figure 1-13 GAD 43/43e AHRS Adapter
1.1.2.8
GTX 330/330D/335
NOTE: GTX 330/330D/335 can also be used to display traffic information
on the GDU 620.
The GTX 330/330D/335 is a solid-state transponder that provides Modes A,
C, and S functions. The transponder provides traffic information to the display
through an ARINC 429 digital interface. A typical GTX 330/330D Mode S
Transponder is shown below.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1.1.2.7
Figure 1-14 GTX 330/330D Mode S Transponder
1-12
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
1.1.2.9
GFC 500/600
Appendix A
Index
1-13
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 7
Symbols
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP) - The ESP function provides
a soft barrier to keep the aircraft within the operating envelope when the
autopilot is not engaged.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) - The optional Manual Electric Trim
uses the same servo as the auto-trim function and allows the pilot to
command trim via a trim switch when the autopilot is not engaged. The
MET function does not preclude the use of the aircraft’s basic mechanical
trim system.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Yaw Damper (YD) - The optional Yaw Damper function provides Dutch
Roll damping, assists in turn coordination, and provides a steady force
to help maintain directional trim. If installed the YD comes on when the
autopilot is engaged. It can be turned on/off independent of the autopilot
and may be used during normal hand-flying maneuvers.
Sec 3
MFD
• Autopilot (AP) - The autopilot function is provided by servo actuators
which move the flight control surfaces in response to Flight Director
steering commands, aircraft attitude, and airspeed. The optional pitch
auto-trim function relieves any sustained effort required by the pitch
servo to keep the aircraft in trim.
Sec 2
PFD
• Flight Director (FD) - The Flight Director function provides pitch and
roll commands to guide the aircraft toward the active reference. Pitch and
roll commands are displayed on the PFD as Command Bars. When the
Flight Director is active, the pitch and roll commands can be hand-flown
by the pilot. When the Autopilot is engaged the autopilot servos drive the
flight controls to follow the commands issued by the Flight Director.
Sec 1
System
The GFC 500 is a two axis Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) with
optional pitch trim as well as electronic stability and protection. The GFC 600
is a high performance, attitude-based AFCS that supports an extensive set of
operating modes and safety features. Supported functions vary by installation.
The GFC 500/600 provide the following main operating functions:
Foreword
CAUTION: The GMC 605 USB port is not designed to provide power or
data to external consumer devices such as smart phones, cameras, or
tablet computers and should not be used in flight.
Foreword
1.2
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
NOTE: See the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for specific procedures
concerning avionics power application and emergency power supply
operation.
NOTE: Refer to section 6 for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
The G500/G600 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and
receives power directly from the electrical buses. To ensure safe operation, the
GDU 620 and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous
built-in test features that exercise the processor, memory, external inputs, and
outputs.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed. All system
annunciations should disappear typically within the first 30 seconds after powerup. Upon power-up, display bezel key backlights momentarily illuminate.
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings
Level” is displayed. The AHRS should display valid attitude and heading fields
typically within the first minute after power-up. The AHRS can align itself both
while taxiing and during level flight.
NOTE: Fastest AHRS alignment is achieved with the aircraft stationary and
with all AHRS inputs valid (3-D GPS position, magnetometer, and air data).
During initial power up on the ground, no GPS position and/or magnetic
anomalies are common. If the aircraft is taxied prior to AHRS alignment,
alignment may be delayed until after a valid 3-D GPS position is available.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
System Power Up
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: During in-flight alignment of the AHRS, minimize aircraft
maneuvering. The AHRS will align with shallow banking and pitch angles
(less than 20 degrees of roll or 5 degrees of pitch). AHRS alignment may
not be possible during more aggressive maneuvers.
1-14
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
When the MFD powers up, the unit displays the following information:
• Software version and part number
• Basemap database version
• Terrain database version
• Obstacle database expiration date
• Aviation database expiration date
• Airport Directory database expiration date
• Chart database status
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Current databases display in white. Databases display in yellow if expired,
not yet effective, or current GPS date/time is unavailable.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 1-15 System Start-up Pages
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
1-15
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
For GRS 77/79:
For GSU 75:
GRS MV DB UPDATE AVAILABLE:
UPDATE AS FOLLOWS?
yyyy to yyyy
###-#####-## to ###-#####-##
GSU AHRS MV DB UPDATE AVAILABLE:
UPDATE AS FOLLOWS?
yyyy to yyyy
###-#####-## to ###-#####-##
To initiate the update process, follow the on-screen instructions.
1. When the Update message appears, press the ENT key with “OK” highlighted.
To update at another time, turn the Large knob to highlight “Cancel” and then
press ENT.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
International Geomagnetic Reference Field
The IGRF (International Geomagnetic Reference Field) model is contained
in the AHRS and is only updated once every five years. The IGRF model is
part of the Navigation Database. At system power-up, the IGRF models in the
AHRS and in the Navigation Database are compared, and if the IGRF model
in the AHRS is out of date, the user is prompted to update the IGRF model in
the AHRS. After the G500 start-up screen is acknowledged on the MFD, the
following update message appears.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1.3
Index
Figure 1-16 GRS MV DB Update
2. After the update is complete, press the ENT key to continue normal operation.
1-16
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
1.4
System Operation
Pilot Controls
1.4.1.1
Sec 2
PFD
The GDU 620 controls have been designed to simplify system operation and
minimize the time required to access functionality. Controls are located on the
display bezels and are comprised of a PFD knob, MFD dual concentric knobs,
bezel keys, and soft keys.
Sec 1
System
1.4.1
Foreword
NOTE: Refer to section 6 for detailed descriptions of all alerts and
annunciations.
PFD Knob
Course
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Vertical Speed
Mode
Barometer
Mode
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Heading
Mode
Sec 3
MFD
Pressing the PFD knob performs the default action for the selected mode.
Refer to section 1.4.1.2 for details on the PFD bezel keys.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: After 10 seconds of inactivity in another mode, the PFD knob’s
selected mode reverts to Heading mode.
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Turn the PFD knob to select the desired value.
Sec 7
Symbols
1. Press the desired PFD mode selection key (HDG, CRS, ALT, V/S, or BARO). A
window will display near the HSIs upper left corner showing the current mode
value.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 1-17 Selection Modes Adjusted with the PFD Knob
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
1-17
PFD Bezel Keys
NOTE: See section 5.4 for autopilot functions using the PFD Bezel Keys.
Heading (HDG)
Selects Heading Select mode. This is the default mode for the PFD knob.
Pressing the PFD knob in Heading mode will center the Heading Bug on the
current Heading. Set the heading bug on the HSI by turning the PFD knob after
pressing the HDG key.
Course (CRS)
Selects Course Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in Course mode will
center the CDI for a VOR or GPS OBS course.
Altimeter (ALT)
Selects Altitude Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in Altitude Select mode
will enter the current altitude in the Altitude Select window. Set the Altitude Bug
by turning the PFD knob after pressing the ALT key.
Altitude Select Window
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1.4.1.2
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Altitude Bug
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Current Altitude
Appendix A
Barometric Setting
Index
Figure 1-18 Pressing PFD Knob Sets Altitude Select to Current Altitude
1-18
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Vertical Speed (V/S)
Sec 1
System
Vertical Speed Bug
Foreword
Selects Vertical Speed (V/S) mode. Pressing the PFD knob in V/S mode will
synchronize the bug to the current vertical speed.
Current Vertical Speed
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Vertical Speed Bug Setting
Figure 1-19 Pressing V/S Knob Sets Vertical Speed Bug to Current Vertical Speed
Sec 5
Additional
Features
For aircraft with vertical speed operating limitations, red bands showing
Vertical Speed Maximum and Minimum ranges will be shown on the left side
of the Vertical Speed tape. When the Vertical Speed Indicator value exceeds one
of its limits, the background color of the Vertical Speed Indicator will turn red.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Vertical Speed Maximum
Vertical Speed Bug
Current Vertical Speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
Sec 8
Glossary
Vertical Speed Minimum
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Index
Figure 1-20 Vertical Speed Warning Indication
Appendix A
Vertical Speed Bug Setting
1-19
Foreword
Sec 1
System
1.4.1.3
MFD Knobs
The MFD knobs are for navigating and selecting information on the MFD
pages. More details are provided in the MFD section.
Sec 2
PFD
Small (Inner) MFD Knob
Selects a specific page within a page group. Pressing the small MFD knob
turns the selection cursor ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be
entered in the applicable window by turning the small and large MFD knobs. In
this case, the large MFD knob moves the cursor on the page and the small MFD
knob selects individual characters or values for the highlighted cursor location.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selects Barometric Setting Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in Baro mode
toggles between standard pressure (29.92 in/1013 mb) and the previously
selected value.
Sec 3
MFD
Barometer (BARO)
Large (Outer) MFD Knob
Selects the MFD page group. When the cursor is ON, the large MFD knob
moves the cursor to highlight available fields.
1.4.1.4
MFD Bezel Keys
Menu
Enter (ENT)
Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access
additional features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
Clear (CLR)
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus. Pressing and
holding the CLR key displays the Navigation Map 1 page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 7
Symbols
Pressing the Range arrow keys changes the range on the Map pages. The Up
arrow zooms out. The Down arrow zooms in. The keys also aid in scrolling up
and down text pages.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Range (RNG)
1-20
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
1.4.2
Using the Soft Key Controls
Foreword
MFD functions indicated by the soft key labels vary depending on the page
selected and are located at the bottom of the MFD display. Press the soft key
located directly below the soft key label. To select the function indicated on the
soft key label, press the soft key directly below the label.
Sec 1
System
Selected Soft Key Unselected Soft Keys
Sec 3
MFD
Soft Key Labels
Sec 2
PFD
The soft keys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The soft key
labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being displayed. The bezel
keys below the soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key.
Soft Keys
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 1-21 MFD Soft Key Layout
Using the Page Menus
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Navigating within a Menu
1. Press the MENU key to display the menu.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The GDU 620 has a dedicated MENU key that when pressed displays a
context-sensitive list of options for functions in the MFD. This options list allows
the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically
relate to the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing
menu. Some menus provide access to additional submenus that are used to view,
edit, select, and review options. Menus display “No Options” when there are no
options for the window/page selected. Soft key presses do not display menus or
submenus.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1.4.3
Appendix A
2. Turn the small or large MFD knob to scroll through a list of available options (a
scroll bar always appears to the right of the window/box when the option list
is longer than the window/box).
3. Press the ENT key to select the desired option.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
1-21
Index
4. Press the CLR key or MFD knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
Options for MAP Window
Sec 1
System
Foreword
No Options Available
Figure 1-22 Page Menu Examples
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
1.4.4
System Settings
G500/G600 system settings are managed from the Aux Mode System
Setup Page. For details on changing settings, refer to section 3.
1. From the first AUX page, press the small MFD knob and turn the large MFD
knob to highlight the desired value.
3. Press ENTER to save the setting.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select “ON” or “OFF.”
Index
Figure 1-23 System Setup Page
1-22
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 3
MFD
Nav Status
option not
available
in all
installations.
Bearing distances
(information windows)
Distance (information
window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS field (Navigation
Status Box)
All distances on MFD
All speeds on MFD
Airspeed
Indicator
True Airspeed
Wind speed
vector
Map range
(Traffic
Page,
Terrain
Proximity
Page)
Appendix A
Index
1-23
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 7
Symbols
On, Off
Imperial (SM, MPH)
Metric (KM, KPH)
Nautical (NM, KT)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Date
Time
Time Format
Time Offset
SAT, TAT, ISA
Sec 5
Additional
Features
PFD wind vector display
format.
Location of GPS
navigation data.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Share databases
Sec 2
PFD
Temperature
Reference
CDI/VDI Preview
Distance and
Speed
Exceptions
Sec 1
System
Data/Time
Affected Quantities
Brightness levels on the
PFD and MFD
Reference markers on
PFD airspeed tap
Foreword
Category
Settings
Display Brightness Level
Mode
Airspeeds
Glide (or REF)
VR
VX (or V1)
VY (or V2)
Synchronization CDI - On/Off
BARO - On/Off
Databases - On/Off
Chart Streaming On/Off
Off, Style 1 - Style 4
PFD Options
(Wind Vector)
(NAV Status)
Style 1-2
Foreword
Settings
Feet
Meters
Navigation Angle
Magnetic (North)
True (North)
Barometric Setting Inches (in)
Hectopascals (hpa)
Temperature
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Data Link (WX/TFR XM
Source)
FIS
GFDS (for Connext
Weather)
Affected Quantities
All elevations on MFD
Exceptions
Altimeter
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Barometric pressure on
PFD
All temperatures on PFD
Select weather source.
Table 1-4 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Category
Altitude and
Vertical Speed
1-24
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
1.4.5
Display Backlighting
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Manual Adjustment 0.1% to 50%
or Auto (1.7%)
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired brightness Level and then press
ENTER.
Sec 1
System
Backlighting Adjustment
1. From the first AUX page, press the small MFD knob to highlight the “DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS” “MODE” box.
Foreword
The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel keys can be
adjusted automatically or manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting
adjustment) uses the photocell located at the top right corner of the bezel to
automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration
curves are configured by the installer to optimize display appearance through a
broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Display backlighting adjustment can
be manually controlled using the aircraft’s existing instrument panel dimmer bus
or performing the following procedures.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Auto or Manual
Figure 1-24 Display Brightness Adjustment
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the MODE field. Turn the small MFD
knob to select “AUTO” or “MANUAL” and then press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
1-25
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
1-26
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Foreword
Functions on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) are accessed by using the
bezel keys on the side of the PFD and the soft keys below the PFD.
Horizon Slip/Skid Roll Scale Roll
Line
Indicator
Zero Pointer
Current
Barometric
Pressure Setting
Heading Bug Select
Course Select
Altitude Bug Select
Vertical Speed Bug Select
Barometric Setting Select
Air Temperature
PFD Knob
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Vertical
Speed Tape
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Horizontal
Situation
Indicator
SD Card Slots
Sec 7
Symbols
Current Nav
Source
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Clock Soft Keys Soft Key Labels
Figure 2-1 PFD Description (Ground Pointer Mode)
Desired Track
Distance from Your
Present Position to
Current FPL Leg Wpt
Current Track
Current FPL
Leg Wpt
Sec 8
Glossary
Nav Status Style 1 - Top of Display
Nav Status Style 2 - Left of HSI
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-1
Index
NOTE: When navigating to a waypoint very far away, the DTK, CRS, and
TRK values displayed on the GDU 620 may differ from those displayed
on the navigator, however the CDI is correct and is the primary means
of navigation. This is because the GDU 620 applies magnetic variation
corrections for the current aircraft location, but some navigators apply
magnetic variation correction for the waypoint location.
Appendix A
Figure 2-2 PFD Nav Status Bar Description
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 3
MFD
PFD Knob Mode Indicator
Wind Vectors
Sec 2
PFD
Altitude Tape
Air Speed Tape
Sec 1
System
Nav Status Bar
PFD Soft Keys
AP TEST
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.1
CDI
PFD
1-2
GPS
Source 1
VOR/ILS
Source 2
SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS
Sec 2
PFD
DME
Sec 3
MFD
DME NAV 1
DME NAV 2
DME HOLD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
BRG
BRG 1
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NAV 1
GPS 1
ADF
BRG 2
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NAV 2
GPS 2
ADF
CLK/TMR
Sec 7
Symbols
HIDE
CLOCK/TIMER
START/STOP
RESET
BACK
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 2-3 PFD Soft Key Diagram
The soft keys are located along the bottom of the displays below the soft key
labels. The soft key labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being
displayed. The soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key function.
Index
Appendix A
SYN VIS
2-2
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Selected Soft Key
Unselected Soft Key
Foreword
Soft Key Labels
Soft Keys
Sec 1
System
Unselected Soft Key
Soft Key Not Available
For Selection
Sec 2
PFD
Soft Key Labels
Figure 2-4 PFD Soft Key Layout
CDI
Appendix A
The 1-2 soft key toggles between the available receivers for selected
navigation source (i.e. GPS1 and GPS2 or VOR/LOC1 and VOR/LOC2). This
soft key will only be present if the system is configured for a second GPS or
VOR/LOC.
Sec 8
Glossary
1-2
Sec 7
Symbols
The CDI soft key toggles between the selection of GPS or VOR/LOC as the
active navigation source. In a single GDU 620 system, the GDU CDI soft key will
change the source in the connected navigator and making a source change in the
navigator will be reflected in the GDU 620. In a dual GDU 620 system, the CDI
keys in the navigator will be disabled.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The AP TEST soft key is available if the GAD 43 is used to provide attitude
information to an autopilot. The AP TEST soft key disengages the autopilot as
part of the GAD 43 test.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
AP Test
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: If a soft key is pressed and held for longer than 1 second, it is
ignored.
Sec 3
MFD
When a soft key is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background
and remains this way until it is turned off, at which time it reverts to white text
on black background. When a soft key function is disabled, the soft key label is
subdued (dimmed).
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-3
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
PFD
Pressing the PFD soft key displays the SYN VIS, DME, BRG, and BACK
soft keys. The DME and SYN VIS soft keys will only be present if the system is
configured for these features.
BRG1
The BRG1 soft key cycles through the available bearing 1 indicator modes
(NAV1, GPS1, ADF, or None).
BRG2
The BRG2 soft key cycles through the available bearing 2 indicator modes
(NAV2, GPS2, ADF, or None). This soft key will only be present if the system is
configured for a second GPS or VOR/LOC.
The DME NAV soft keys select the DME submenu. For some installations,
the DME NAV soft keys simply toggle the DME display on/off as the submenu
options will not exist. The availability of the DME controls vary based on the
installation.
The DME NAV soft keys select NAV 1 or 2 as the DME tuning source. If this
soft key is pressed again when already selected, the DME display is removed
from the PFD. Not all installations will have both NAV1 and NAV2 soft keys.
DME Information
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
DME
DME Hold Annunciation
Selected DME
Set Hold for Selected DME
Figure 2-5 DME Soft Keys
DME HOLD
DME HOLD activates/deactivates the DME tuning hold function. DME HOLD
may be selected for either DME NAV 1 or DME NAV 2. The Hold function
is automatically canceled when switching between NAV1 and NAV2 tuning
sources. Not all installations will have the DME HOLD soft key.
SYN VIS
The SYN VIS soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is installed.
It enables Synthetic Vision and displays the associated soft keys.
2-4
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
SYN TERR
Foreword
The SYN TERR soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is installed
and enables synthetic terrain depiction.
HRZN HDG
Sec 1
System
The HRZN HDG soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is
installed. Pressing this key enables horizon heading marks and digits.
APTSIGNS
The Clock/Timer function displays a clock or timer window in the lower left
corner of the PFD.
Select
Timer
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Hide Clock
Sec 3
MFD
CLK/TMR
Sec 2
PFD
The APTSIGNS soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is
installed and enables airport sign posts.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Select
Start
Reset
Clock
Timer
Timer
Figure 2-6 Clock and Timer Functions
Hide Timer
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
BACK
The BACK soft key returns to the previous soft key menu.
Airspeed Indicator
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-5
Index
The Airspeed Indicator provides Indicated Airspeed, True Airspeed, and
Ground Speed. The Airspeed Trend Indicator shows what the airspeed will be
in six seconds, if the current acceleration is maintained. The actual airspeed is
displayed inside the black pointer.
Appendix A
NOTE: Airspeed units (KTS, MPH, KPH) are configured to match the approved
units for the installation.
Sec 8
Glossary
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a
moving tape. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are
marked at intervals of 10 units, while minor tick marks on the moving tape are
indicated at intervals of five units. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, regardless
of the displayed units.
Sec 7
Symbols
2.2
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Ground Speed
Caution Range (yellow)
Airspeed Trend Indicator (pink/magenta line)
Glide Speed Reference Marker
Sec 3
MFD
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, pink/magenta line, extending up or
down on the airspeed scale, shown to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip. The end of the trend vector corresponds to the predicted airspeed in six
seconds if the current acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses into
the overspeed range, the text of the digital airspeed readout changes to yellow.
The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to
calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
Vr Reference Marker
Vx Reference Marker
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Landing Gear Extension Speed
Vy Reference Marker
Normal Operating Range (Green)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Flaps Operating Range (White)
True Airspeed
Airspeed Units
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 2-7 Airspeed Tape
Sec 7
Symbols
Overspeed Indication for
Current Airspeed
Sec 8
Glossary
Overspeed Range (Barber Pole)
Caution Operating Range
Index
Appendix A
Figure 2-8 Overspeed Indication
2-6
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
Selected Airspeed Bug
Foreword
The Selected Airspeed Bug displays when IAS mode is engaged on the
GFC 500/600.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 2-9 Selected Airspeed Bug
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-7
Markings
A color-coded (white, green, yellow, and red/white “barber pole”) speed
range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors are configured to match
the approved markings for the installation. Refer to the AFM/POH.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.2.1
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: The actual colors and patterns of the airspeed tape may vary by
installation. See your AFM/POH for more details.
Sec 3
MFD
Mmo / Vmo / VNE
VNO
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
VFE
VS1
Sec 5
Additional
Features
VSO
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 2-10 Typical Airspeed Tape Markings
Sec 7
Symbols
VYSE
Sec 8
Glossary
White Triangle
VMCA
VLE
Index
Appendix A
Figure 2-11 Additional Reference Markings
2-8
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2.2.2
Reference Speeds
Sec 2
PFD
Vr Reference Marker
Vx Reference Marker
Sec 1
System
Glide Reference Marker
Foreword
V-speeds (Glide, Vr, VX, and VY) default values are set during the installation
process, but can be changed and turned on/off from the System Setup page
on the first page of the Aux page group. When active (on), the V-speeds are
displayed at their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale.
Sec 3
MFD
Vy Reference Marker
Figure 2-12 Reference Speeds
Sec 5
Additional
Features
VREF Reference Marker
V2 Reference Marker
V1 Reference Marker
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The labels for the reference markers may vary as configured during installation.
Vr Reference Marker
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 2-13 Alternate Reference Speeds
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-9
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Aircraft Symbol
4
Horizon Line
8
5
Land Representation
6
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
9
1
3
4
7
5
Figure 2-14 Attitude Indicator
Angle of bank is indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale.
Major tick marks are 30º and 60º and minor tick marks are 10º, 20º, and 45º
are shown to the left and right of the zero.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator
moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally away from the pointer to
indicate lateral acceleration. Slip/skid is indicated by the location of the bar
relative to the pointer. One bar displacement (as shown below) is equal to one
ball displacement on a traditional Slip/Skid Indicator.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 7
Symbols
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line,
major pitch marks and numeric labels are shown for every 10º, up to 80º. Minor
pitch marks are shown for intervening 5º increments, up to 25º below and 45º
above the horizon line. Between 20º below to 20º above the horizon line, minor
pitch marks occur every 2.5º.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Attitude Indicator
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground
with a white horizon line. The Attitude Indicator displays pitch, roll, and
slip/skid information.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.3
2-10
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Roll Pointer
Slip/Skid Indicator
Foreword
Roll Scale Zero
Sec 1
System
Figure 2-15 Slip/Skid Indication
Sec 2
PFD
In an aircraft with an Attitude Indicator that has a Ground Pointer, the pointer
above the Roll Scale shifts with the roll or bank angle of the aircraft to keep the
Roll Scale Zero Pointer pointing towards the ground.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Roll Scale Zero Pointer
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Roll Pointer
Sec 3
MFD
The standby mechanical Attitude Indicator in your aircraft is either a Ground
Pointer or a Roll Pointer configuration. The GDU 620 Attitude Indicator has
been configured in either a Ground Pointer or a Roll Pointer configuration to
match the configuration of your aircraft’s standby Attitude Indicator. Ground/
Sky Pointer mode is configured during installation and can not be changed by
the pilot.
Roll Scale
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 2-16 Attitude Indicator with Ground Pointer Configuration in a Left Turn
Roll Pointer
Roll Scale
Appendix A
Roll Scale Zero Pointer
Sec 8
Glossary
In an aircraft with an Attitude Indicator that has a Sky Pointer, the pointer
below the roll scale shifts with the roll or bank angle of the aircraft to keep the
Roll Pointer pointing towards the sky.
Index
Figure 2-17 Attitude Indicator with Sky Pointer Configuration in Left Turn
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-11
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.3.1
Extreme Attitude
Extreme attitude is defined as a roll greater than 65º left or right, 30º pitch up,
or 20º pitch down. Red chevrons are displayed at greater than 50º pitch up and
30º pitch down. The PFD will “declutter” when the aircraft enters an extreme
attitude. Only the primary functions will be displayed in these situations.
The following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding soft
keys are disabled) when the aircraft is in an unusual attitude:
• Selected Altitude, Barometer
• BARO and Radar Altimeter
Minimums
Setting, and Selected Vertical
Speed
• Clock/Timer Field
• TAS Airspeed and Airspeed
Units
• DME Field
• Fast/Slow Indicator
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Flight Director Command Bars
• GPSS Annunciation
• Traffic and Terrain
Annunciations
• Marker Beacon Annunciation
• Vertical Course Deviation
Indicator and Glideslope
Annunciation
• NAV Status
• Wind Field
• Knob Mode Annunciation
• Radar Altimeter Digital Readout
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Outside Air Temperature
2-12
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 2-18 Extreme Pitch Indication Figure 2-19 Extreme Pitch Indication Nose Down
Nose Up
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 2-20 Extreme Roll Indication with Display Declutter
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-13
Altimeter
The altimeter displays the current altitude, altitude trend, altitude bug setting,
altitude bug, and the current BARO setting.
The Altitude Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line, extending up or down
on the left side of the Altitude scale. The end of the trend vector corresponds to
the predicted altitude in six seconds if the current vertical speed is maintained.
The Altitude Bug is displayed at the selected Altitude Bug setting. A portion
of the Altitude Bug will be displayed at the top or the bottom of the altitude tape
if the selected Altitude Bug is off of the tape.
When an optional Radar Altimeter is installed, the altitude received from the
radar altitude will be displayed on the PFD. See the Radar Altimeter section for
more details.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.4
2-14
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2.4.1
Setting the Altitude Bug and Alerter
Sec 1
System
1. Press the ALT key to activate Altitude mode.
2. Turn the PFD knob to move the Altitude Bug to a desired altitude.
3. Press the center of the PFD knob to set the selected altitude to the current
altitude.
Sec 3
MFD
Selected Altitude
in the Altitude
Alerter window
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
VNAV Altitude
Constraint
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Current Altitude
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Barometric Setting
Sec 7
Symbols
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Sec 2
PFD
OR
Altitude
Trend
Indicator
Foreword
Normally the altitude alerter only allows selection of altitudes in 100 foot
increments. When a value other than 100 feet is set for the minimums, it
becomes a selectable value in the altitude alerter.
Figure 2-21 Altimeter
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-15
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural
alerts (if interfaced to an audio panel) when approaching the Selected Altitude.
Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset.
NOTE: The Altitude Alerter function may be disabled in some installations.
When the Altitude Alerter is disabled, pressing the ALT key will result in
an "ALT KEY INOP" message.
The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1,000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected
Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) changes to black text on a light blue
background, and flashes for five seconds. An audio alert may be generated,
if configured.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected
Altitude changes to light blue text on a black background and flashes for
five seconds and an aural tone may be generated, if configured.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation
band (beyond ±200 feet of the Selected Altitude), the Selected Altitude
changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and
an aural tone is generated.
Within 1000 ft
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
Altitude Alerting
Sec 1
System
2.4.2
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 2-22 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: The aural tone when approaching the selected altitude may be
configured at installation for either 200 feet or 1,000 feet. The tone when
deviating from the selected altitude always occurs at 200 feet.
2-16
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2.4.3
Sec 2
PFD
Description
Indicates the aircraft must be at or above displayed altitude.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Indicates the aircraft must be at displayed altitude.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Indicates the aircraft must be at or below displayed altitude.
Sec 3
MFD
Visual
Annunciation
Sec 1
System
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) altitude constraints display when guidance
is received from a GTN 650/750 with software v6.50 or later. Refer to GTN
625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide or GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide for additional information.
Altitudes are manually entered in the GTN or retrieved from the published
altitudes in the navigation database. Altitude constraints are displayed in feet
mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An altitude constraint in
feet above ground level (AGL) is supported for airports.
Foreword
VNAV Altitude Constraints (Software v7.30 or
Later)
Table 2-1 Vertical Speed Settings
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-17
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.4.4
Changing Barometric Setting
The Barometric Setting affects the altitude values shown on the PFD.
Barometric pressure units may be displayed as either inches (in) or hectopascals
(hpa). For additional details, refer to section 3.
1. Press the BARO key to activate Baro mode.
2. Turn the PFD knob to increase or decrease the altimeter setting.
OR
3. Press the PFD knob while in Baro mode to toggle between Standard Pressure
(29.92 in) and the currently selected barometric setting.
Baro Setting shown
in Altimeter window
Figure 2-23 Barometric Setting
Baro-Corrected Altitude Versus GPS-MSL Altitude
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the
altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions. The most accurate barocorrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting
to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual
atmospheric conditions seldom match the standard conditions defined by the
International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure, temperature,
and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude
(as read from the altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL altitude. This variation
results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from the baro-corrected altitude.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
PFD Knob Selected
Baro Setting
2-18
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2.4.5
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Yellow When
Altitude Reached
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Barometric
Minimums
Bug
Barometric
Minimums
Box
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
White Within 100 ft
Sec 3
MFD
The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
• The Minimums box appears with the altitude value in cyan text. Once in
range, the Altitude Minimums Bug appears in cyan on the altitude tape.
• When the aircraft is within 100 feet of the selected altitude setting, the bug
and text turn white.
• Once the aircraft reaches the selected altitude minimums setting, the bug
and the altitude text turn yellow and the aural “Minimums, minimums”
alert is made one time. The text remains in yellow until the aircraft altitude
is more than 50 feet above the set altitude minimum value.
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: The Altitude Minimums Alerting Bug appears parked at the bottom
of the altitude tape as soon as a value is set in the minimums alerter. The
bug will unpark and start to move up the tape as soon as the altitude is
within the range of the tape. The bug is reset when power is cycled.
Sec 1
System
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or
Decision Height (DH) alert can be displayed on the PFD. The values are set
in the Active Flight Plan page or from the Charts page menu. When active,
the minimum descent altitude setting is displayed in the minimums box at the
bottom left of the Altitude Tape.
Foreword
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height
Alerting
Appendix A
Figure 2-24 Barometric MDA/DH - Alerting Visual Annunciations
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-19
Yellow When
Altitude Reached
Sec 1
System
Radar
Altimeter
Minimums
Bug
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
White Within 100 ft
Radar
Altimeter
Minimums
Box
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft
reaches 150 feet above the selected Minimum Altitude. In dual installations, the
minimums alerting altitude value may be set from either GDU 620 and will be
synchronized on both units.
Setting the Altitude Minimums Bug is performed on either the FPL - Active
Flight Plan page or the FPL - Charts page.
For information about setting the Altitude Minimums Bug on the Active
Flight Plan page, refer to section 3.
For information about setting the Altitude Minimums Bug on the Charts
page, refer to section 5.
NOTE: If you highlight the minimums Altitude field and press the CLR key,
it will turn the minimums alerting functionality off.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 2-25 Radar Altimeter - Alerting Visual Annunciations
2-20
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2.5
Vertical Speed Indicator
Foreword
Vertical speed (V/S) data is presented on the bottom right of the PFD. A
Vertical Speed bug and a bug setting are also available.
Sec 1
System
Max Vertical Speed
Required Vertical Speed
Vertical Speed Bug
Current Vertical Speed
Sec 2
PFD
Min Vertical Speed
Sec 3
MFD
Vertical Speed Bug Setting
Figure 2-26 Vertical Speed Tape and Window
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Altitude Tape Range
500 ft
600 ft
700 ft
Sec 8
Glossary
Airspeed Tape Range
60 kts
70 kts
80 kts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
VSI (set by installer)
±2000 fpm
±3000 fpm
±4000 fpm
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed using
a non-moving tape. The tape can be scaled at ±2000, ±3000, or ±4000 fpm as
set by the installer. Major gradations are every 1000 fpm and minor gradations
every 500 fpm. The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer along the
tape. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than
100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds the vertical speed displayed on
the tape, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate
appears inside the pointer. The Vertical Speed Indicator range determines the
airspeed tape range and altitude tape range.
Table 2-2 Vertical Speed Settings
Appendix A
Setting the Vertical Speed Indicator Bug
1. Press the V/S key to activate Vertical Speed mode.
2. Turn the PFD knob to change the Vertical Speed Bug.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-21
Index
3. Press the center of the PFD knob to set the Vertical Speed value to the current
vertical speed.
Horizontal Situation Indicator
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in
a heading-up orientation. Letters indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels
occur every 30º. Major tick marks are at 10º intervals and minor tick marks at
5º intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI,
and the current ground track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond.
The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation
source information. The “MSG” annunciation will be shown in the HSI when
an unacknowledged message is present on the selected navigator. When the
message is acknowledged, the “MSG” annunciation will clear.
13
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.6
14
15
1
12
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2
3
11
4
10
5
9
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
6
7
8
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
16
1
Turn Rate Indicator
9
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Course Pointer
10
GPS Level of Service
3
Heading Bug
11
To/From Indicator
4
Navigation Source
12
Current Track Indicator
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Card
15
Lubber Line
8
OBS Mode Active
16
MSG (Message) on Navigator
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
Figure 2-27 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
2-22
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
New Heading Bug Setting
(True North)
Current Heading
(True north)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
New Heading Bug Setting
(Magnetic North)
Current Heading
(Magnetic North)
Heading Bug
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: The current heading will have a "T" to the right of the heading
value when the Nav Angle is set to True in the System Setup page of the
Aux page group.
Sec 3
MFD
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 10 seconds
after being adjusted. The light blue bug on the compass rose corresponds to the
Selected Heading.
Sec 2
PFD
Setting the Heading Bug
Sec 1
System
2.6.1
Foreword
The 360º HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course
Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The course
pointer is a single line arrow (GPS1, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double line arrow
(GPS2, VOR2, and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. “LOC”
will automatically be displayed if a localizer frequency is tuned. The To/From
arrow rotates with the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID
is received.
Figure 2-28 Heading Bug Setting
Sec 7
Symbols
1. Press the HDG key to activate HDG mode.
2. Turn the PFD knob to change the Heading Bug.
Appendix A
1. Press the PFD knob in HDG mode to set the Heading Bug to the current
heading.
Sec 8
Glossary
OR
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-23
Turn Rate Indicator
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card.
Tick marks to the left and right of the lubber line denote half-standard and
standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the current turn
rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds,
based on the present turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator
by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick mark, corresponding
to a predicted heading of 18º from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 degrees per second, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend
vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Turn Rate indication.
Arrowhead shown for
a Turn Rate > 4 degrees
per second
Standard Turn Rate
Heading Bug
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.6.2
Lubber Line
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Half Standard
Turn Rate
Current Track Indicator
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 2-29 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
2-24
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2.7
Course Deviation Indicator
Navigation
Source
Sec 2
PFD
GPS Level
of Service
Sec 1
System
360º HSI
Foreword
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course
pointer along a lateral deviation scale to display aircraft position relative to the
course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not displayed.
Scale
Sec 3
MFD
Crosstrack
Error
CDI
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2.7.1
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: The ILS Localizer and Glideslope deviation indicators will indicate
full-scale deflection for the GNS 480 navigator at the second dot. The
GNS 400W/500W and GTN 6XX/7XX series navigators will indicate
full-scale deflection at the edge of the display.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 2-30 Course Deviation Indicator
CDI Preview
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
When selected, CDI/VDI Preview displays the upcoming VOR/LOC approach in
gray. CDI preview displays as gray hollow lines. Course angle and source displays
in gray text. CDI preview displays for VLOC, LOC Backcourse, Glideslope, and
Glidepath. It is not shown for GPS approaches.
Appendix A
Index
Preview On
Preview Off
Figure 2-31 CDI/VDI Preview
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-25
Changing CDI Sources
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, and LOC).
Color indicates the current navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for
VOR and LOC). The full-scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived
distance when coupled to GPS. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the
CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the
maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack
error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
GPS
Navigator 1
VLOC
Navigator 1
GPS
Navigator 2
VLOC
Navigator 2
Figure 2-32 CDI Navigation Sources
1. Press the CDI soft key to toggle between GPS and VOR/LOC source type.
2. Press 1-2 soft key to toggle between the 1 and 2 navigators of the GPS or VOR/
LOC sources.
3. Verify the navigation source by the indication on the HSI and in the upper left
corner of the PFD.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.7.2
NOTE: The selected navigator is the active navigator for all PFD and MFD
operations, except for the supplemental bearing pointers.
2-26
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2.7.3
Changing CDI Course
Sec 1
System
New Course Setting
Foreword
The Selected Course is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 10 seconds after
being adjusted.
Figure 2-33 Course Setting
Sec 2
PFD
1. Press the CRS key to activate Course mode.
1. Press the PFD knob to set a Course that will center the CDI to the VOR station
or waypoint if in GPS OBS mode.
Vertical Deviation Indicator
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Vertical Deviation Source
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The Vertical Deviation (Glideslope) Indicator (VDI) appears to the left of
the VSI whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active NAV field. A green
diamond acts as the VDI Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional
indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope signal,
“NO GS” is annunciated. The glideslope on an ILS approach is hidden if the
current track is more than 90 degrees from the selected course. This prevents the
glideslope from being displayed during localizer backcourse approaches.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2.7.4
Sec 3
MFD
2. Turn the PFD knob to change the Course values.
OR
Vertical Deviation Indicator
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 2-34 Vertical Deviation Indicator (ILS Source)
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-27
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
The vertical deviation is similar to the glideslope for GPS approaches
supporting WAAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V). When
an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected
navigation source, the Vertical Deviation Indicator appears as a magenta
diamond. If the approach type downgrades to LNAV past the final approach fix
(FAF), or the approach only supports LNAV service, “NO GP” is annunciated.
The vertical deviation displays when a visual approach is loaded by a
GTN 650/750 with software v6.30 or later.
Vertical Deviation Source
Figure 2-35 Vertical Deviation Indicator (GPS Source)
The VDI displays as a magenta chevron when VNAV guidance is received
from a GTN 650/750 with software v6.50 or later. This feature is available on
GDU 620s with software v7.30 or later.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Vertical Deviation Indicator
Sec 7
Symbols
Vertical Deviation Source
Vertical Deviation Indicator
Sec 8
Glossary
Required Vertical Speed
Index
Appendix A
Figure 2-36 Vertical Deviation Indicator (VNAV)
2-28
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
When selected, CDI/VDI preview displays upcoming vertical navigation. VDI
preview displays as a gray hollow diamond. VDI preview displays for VLOC,
Glideslope, and Glidepath.
Sec 1
System
VDI Preview
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 2-37 VDI Preview
Auto-Slewing
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
3. The CDI selection on the GDU 620 is changed to NAV course pointer for the
active navigator.
Sec 7
Symbols
2. The appropriate frequency is the active frequency in the navigator.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
1. The desired approach is selected and activated in the navigator (this can be
verified by the approach waypoints appearing on the GDU 620 MFD Nav Map
Page or FPL Page).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The G500/G600 system is designed to interface with GPS navigator units
and also manage up to four different CDI course pointers (GPS1, NAV1, GPS2,
NAV2) independently. The G500/G600 will automatically slew the NAV course
pointer to the correct final approach course when a ILS, LOC, LOC BC, LDA or
SDF approach is active in the GPS navigator and the appropriate frequency is
in the active window in the navigator. The G500/G600 will Auto-Slew the HSI
course pointer for an ILS, LOC, LOC BC, LDA, or SDF approach when the steps
below are completed in the following order:
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2.7.5
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-29
Foreword
NOTE: If the NAV course pointer is displayed for the active navigator
when the approach is activated and the localizer frequency is tuned, the
pilot will need to switch to another CDI source and then back to NAV
for the course pointer to Auto-Slew.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
For example, if NAV1 is currently selected, the pilot must:
press the CDI soft key twice: NAV1>GPS1>NAV1
OR
press the 1-2 soft key twice: NAV1>NAV2>NAV1
Example of activating Auto-Slewing in the G500/G600:
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: For LOC BC approaches, the course pointer will slew 180 degrees
from the inbound course.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Course Pointer slewed
to 313° for the ILS
Index
Appendix A
Figure 2-38 Auto-Slewing HSI with ILS Loaded
(Shown with Corresponding Approach Plate)
2-30
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2. The appropriate ILS frequency must be activate in the navigator.
4. Upon approaching the final course, select LOC on the HSI.
Sec 1
System
3. Verify that the waypoints for the approach are displayed on the Nav Map Page
or the FPL Page of the MFD.
Foreword
1. The aircraft is flying vectors to final on an active ILS approach, with the
appropriate approach in the GPS navigator.
NOTE: If auto CDI switching is active on the GPS unit, the GPS will force
the GPS/GDU 620 to NAV when the aircraft is close to the LOC course.
Sec 2
PFD
5. The CDI and course pointer will change from magenta to green and the pointer
will move, or slew, to the final approach course (or 180° from the final approach
course for LOC BC approaches).
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Course Pointer slewed to
313° for the Backcourse
to Runway 13
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 2-39 Auto-Slewing HSI with Localizer Backcourse Loaded
(Shown with Corresponding Approach Plate)
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-31
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
2.8
2.8.1
Supplemental Flight Data
Bearing Pointers
Two Bearing Pointers can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources.
The pointers are light blue and are single- (BRG1) or double-lined (BRG2); an
icon is shown in the respective information window to indicate the pointer
type. The system must be configured for a second navigation source to show the
BRG2 selection.
When a Bearing Pointer is displayed, its associated information window is
also displayed.
The Bearing Information windows are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI
and show:
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Bearing source (GPS, NAV, or ADF)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
The Bearing Pointer is removed from the HSI if:
• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station
• The NAV radio is tuned to a Localizer frequency
• ADF is selected and a signal is not received (if you have an ADF that supports
a valid flag then the bearing pointer will be removed. If your ADF system
does not include a valid flag then the bearing pointer will still be displayed,
regardless of ADF signal validity.)
Bearing 2 Pointer
GPS Level
of Service
Bearing 1 Pointer
Current Navigation Source
CDI
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected
Bearing 1 Source
Bearing 2 Source
Index
Bearing 1
Bearing 2
Pointer Icon Pointer Icon
Figure 2-40 HSI with Bearing Information
2-32
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
MSG
LOI
GPS Advisory
LOI
Suspend
Sec 2
PFD
GPS Mode
Sec 1
System
CDI Source
Foreword
GPS1
GPS2
VOR1
VOR2
LOC1
LOC2
OCN
ENR
TERM
APR
LNAV
LNAV+V
LPV
LNAV/VNAV
LP
LP+V
VISUAL
1.00nm
0.30nm
OBS
SUSP
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 2-41 PFD HSI Annunciations
NOTE: The Bearing Line for navigation source 1 (BRG1) will be a single line.
The Bearing Line for navigation source 2 (BRG2) will be a double line.
Temperature Display
Index
2-33
Appendix A
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 7
Symbols
The outside air temperature is displayed to the left of the HSI. The air
data computer calculates the temperature based on temperature probe and
Pitot-static inputs. The units (°C or °F) and temperature reference are selected
on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP page. The temperature reference can be selected
to one of the following choices:
• Static Air Temperature (SAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
stationary (static) outside air. Conceptually, this is the temperature that
would be read on a thermometer floating stationary at the current location.
• Total Air Temperature (TAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
outside air as it moves past the aircraft, including the rise in temperature
due to air compression and friction at the current airspeed.
• Difference from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) – This is the
difference between SAT and standard (ISA) temperature at the current
altitude. This provides an indication of how much warmer/colder the
temperature is from a “standard” atmosphere.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2.8.2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. Press the BRG 1 or BRG 2 soft keys to toggle between the available Nav
receivers of the selected source (such as: GPS, NAV, or ADF).
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1. Press the PFD soft key to display the navigation source keys.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
2.8.3
Wind Vectors
When selected, wind vector information is displayed in a window on the
PFD to the left of the HSI. The Wind Vector style is configured in the Aux Mode
System Setup page. While on the ground, the Wind Vector window will indicate
“No Wind Data.”
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 2-42 Outside Air Temperature Selection
Figure 2-43 Wind Vector with No Wind Data
Four styles are available as shown below.
Style 2
Style 3
Style 4
Figure 2-44 Wind Vector Style
2.8.4
DME Indication
When selected, DME information is displayed in a window in the lower left
corner of the PFD. The distance to the station and the Nav source used are
shown.
DME Information
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Style 1
DME Hold Annunciation
Selected DME
Set Hold for Selected DME
Figure 2-45 DME Indication
Index
NOTE: The capability of providing DME information requires installation
of the GAD 43e.
2-34
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2.8.5
Marker Beacon Annunciations
Foreword
A visual annunciation of marker beacons will be shown on the display when
the aircraft flies over a marker beacon. The marker beacon annunciation will
appear to the left of the altitude tape below the terrain annunciator on the PFD.
Sec 1
System
Outer Marker
Beacon Indication
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 2-46 Marker Beacon Location
Icon (Standard)
Sec 3
MFD
Current Beacon
Icon (Blink)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Inner Marker
Middle Marker
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Outer Marker
Table 2-3 Marker Beacons
Miscompare Annunciations
Miscompare annunciations are capable of being displayed on the PFD if the
miscompare Monitor is enabled during the installation configuration.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2.8.6
Messages will appear in the MFD alerts window if monitors are enabled and
required data is not present.
Sec 7
Symbols
A miscompare condition is triggered if the difference between the data
reported by GDU 1 and GDU 2 exceeds the threshold described in the following
table for at least one second.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-35
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Range of Trigger
ALL
Both IAS < 35 kts
Either IAS >= 35 kts
Either IAS >= 80 kts
ALL
ALL
Threshold
200 feet
Inhibited
10 kts
7 kts
5 degrees
6 degrees
Table 2-4 Miscompare Conditions
A “MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed on the airspeed tape if a miscompare
condition exists for indicated airspeed. A “MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed
on the altitude tape if a miscompare condition exists for altitude. A “PITCH
MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare
condition exists for pitch and not roll. A “ROLL MISCOMP” annunciation is
displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare condition exists for roll and
not pitch. An “ATTITUDE MISCOMP” annunciation is displayed over the pitch
ladder if a miscompare condition exists for both pitch and roll.
Pitch and Roll Miscompare
Airspeed
Miscompare
Altitude
Miscompare
Pitch Miscompare
Roll Miscompare
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Parameter
Altitude
Indicated Airspeed
Indicated Airspeed
Indicated Airspeed
Pitch
Roll
Index
Figure 2-47 Miscompare Annunciations
2-36
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2.9
Radar Altimeter
Sec 2
PFD
Barometric Altitude
Sec 1
System
NOTE: See the Radar Altimeter documentation for details on the radar
altimeter performance and limitations.
Foreword
When an optional Radar Altimeter is installed, the altitude received from the
radar altitude will be displayed on the PFD.
150 Feet Above Ground
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Brown Band Indicating Ground
Radar Altimeter Value
Figure 2-48 Radar Altimeter Display - 150 ft RA Altitude
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Barometric Altitude
0 Foot Difference
(On Ground)
Sec 8
Glossary
Brown Band Indicating Ground
Figure 2-49 Radar Altimeter Display - 0 ft RA Altitude
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-37
Index
The Radar Altimeter self-test process will be annunciated on the PFD above
the Radar Altimeter altitude value. The self-test is a wiring test to indicate
communication between the GDU and the Radar Altimeter. The self-test will be
cancelled after 15 seconds, the Test key is pressed again, or you leave the System
Setup page.
Appendix A
Radar Altimeter Value
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 5
Additional
Features
When the radar altitude is 0, the brown band will be level with the altitude
tape pointer. As the radar altitude increases above 0, the brown band will move
down the tape in an amount equal to the current radar altitude.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to Aux mode and then turn the small MFD knob to
the System Setup page.
2. Press the RA TEST soft key. "RA TEST" will be annunciated above the Radar
Altimeter value. The Radar Altimeter value will show a certain number to
indicate that communication is taking place between the Radar Altimeter and
the GDU. See your Radar Altimeter documentation for the appropriate value.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
NOTE: Not all Radar Altimeters have the TEST function.
Figure 2-50 Radar Altimeter Test Annunciation
4. If the unit fails the self-test, the RA value will not match the expected value. The
"RA FAIL" annunciation will appear on the PFD when the GDU is not receiving
any Radar Altimeter data. "RA FAIL" is not related to the self-test.
Figure 2-51 Radar Altimeter Failure Annunciation
Radar Altimeter Configurations
Depending on the installation, the pilot will have one of the following
options: BARO or RAD ALT minimums altitude alert (pilot selectable).
• The minimums alerting value is defaulted OFF with a setting of 0 feet.
• The pilot can select alerts ON or OFF and can select the alert altitude
based on either barometric or radar altitude.
• The alert upon descending through the selected altitude is the aural
“minimums, minimums” callout.
• The altitude required to arm the alerting is 150 feet above the selected
altitude.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. Press the RA TEST key again to stop the self-test.
2-38
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2.10 Fast/Slow Indication
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The Fast/Slow indication as provided from an external system is shown on
the left side of the PFD along the horizon line. See your AFM for details on
operation.
Pointer
Sec 2
PFD
Fast/Slow Scale
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 2-52 Fast/Slow Scale and Pointer
PFD units may be set to standard or metric units by the installer. MFD units
may still be selected by the user in the System Setup page of Aux mode.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2.11 PFD Units
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
2-39
This page intentionally left blank
3
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
The Multi-Function Display (MFD) presents a color moving map with
navigation information. Moving map information is shown on the two Navigation
Map pages and the optional Weather (WX) pages. The Navigation Map displays
aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lake, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating
elevation), and hazard data (e.g., traffic, terrain, weather). The map options
set for Navigation Map page 1 are used as the default settings for the optional
Weather (WX) pages. Which data is displayed can be controlled by the
DCLTR soft key and map page MENU selections. The Navigation Map can
be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRACK
UP), Desired Track Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
Map Orientation
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Range Select
Page Group Position
Page Group
Menu
Clear
Enter
SD Card Slots
Small MFD Knob
(Select Page)
Soft Keys
Sec 8
Glossary
Soft Key Labels
Sec 7
Symbols
Page Label
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Terrain and
Obstacles Symbols
Large MFD Knob
(Select Page Group)
Figure 3-1 MFD Description
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-1
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Appendix A
The nose of the aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the
location corresponding to the calculated present position. The aircraft
position and the flight plan legs are based on information received from the
currently selected GPS navigator. The leg of the active flight plan currently
being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation map. The other
legs are shown in white.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
3.1
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Navigation Map Pages
Map displays are used extensively in the GDU 620 to provide situational
awareness in flight. The following information can be displayed on the
Navigation Map Pages:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspace,
• Enhanced Range Ring
airways, land data (highways,
• Flight plan legs
cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
• Track vector
with names
• Topography scale
• Map Pointer information (distance
and bearing to pointer, location of
pointer, name, and other pertinent
information)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
There are map ranges available, from 500 feet to 500 NM. The range
is now indicated in the box on the range ring at the 11 o-clock position
relative to the ownship. To change the map range on any map, press the
RNG keys on the right side of the bezel.
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present
position)
• SiriusXM NEXRAD Weather
• SiriusXM Lightning
• SiriusXM Storm Cells
• Traffic
• Stormscope
• Top of Climb
• Terrain data (includes terrain,
obstacles, and power lines)
For details about the symbols used on the MFD, refer to section 7.
NOTE: Page Group and Page are shown at the bottom of the MFD.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Map orientation
• Topography data
Page
Turn Small MFD knob
Page Group
Turn Large MFD knob
Index
Figure 3-2 Page Group and Page Locator
3-2
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Weather Source
WX Data Window
Foreword
Map Orientation
Terrain Data
Sec 1
System
Elevation Window
Sec 3
MFD
Topo Data Scale
Enhanced
Range Ring
Current Altitude
Default Navigation Map Page
3.1.2
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
While on any page of the MFD, you may easily return to the first Navigation
Map page of the Map group by pressing and holding the CLR key to return
to the first page (Home Page) of the Map group.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-3 MFD Map Description
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Map Overlay Icons
Page Location
Page Name
3.1.1
Sec 2
PFD
Obstacle Icon.
* Indicates Grouped
Obstacles.
Traffic Icons
with Relative
Altitude and Trend
Indicator
Aircraft Symbol
(Present Position)
Map Overlay Icons
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Overlay icons are displayed to indicate data that will be depicted on the
map pages. The icons are shown in the following figure. If the icon is not
displayed, either the menu selection is not ON to display the data or the
display range makes the data ineligible for display. If the icon has a white X
over it then the data is selected ON and the zoom scale is correct, but the
underlying data is not available for some reason. All of the icons may not be
displayed at the same time. In some cases if one feature is selected, another
icon and feature may be disabled. The pilot should check the dedicated
page for the feature that the icon represents to determine why the data is not
available for display (e.g., fail, standby).
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-3
Foreword
Stormscope
Terrain
Obstacle
Wire Obstacle
Traffic
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Figure 3-4 Map Overlay Icon Samples
3.1.3
Selecting Page Options
1. Change the fields or the setup of a page by pressing the MENU key and make
the necessary adjustments with the MFD knobs.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to select desired item.
4. Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
5. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing.
3.1.4
Changing the Navigation Map Range
The Range (RNG) keys on the right side of the bezel are used to change the
map display range. Pressing the
RNG key will zoom out (increasing the
displayed map range) and pressing the
RNG key will zoom in (decreasing
the displayed map range). The Map Range is shown on the outer range ring. The
map ranges available are from 250 feet to 500 NM.
3.1.5
Decluttering Map Pages
The Map Declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through
four levels of decluttering to remove map information. The declutter level is
displayed in the DCLTR soft key.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
3. Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
Index
Appendix A
Figure 3-5 Map Declutter Soft Key
3-4
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Airways
Land/Country Text
1
2
3
Feature
0
1
•
Intersections
•
•
•
Tower
•
•
2
3
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
0
•
TRSA
•
•
•
ADIZ
•
•
Small City
•
Alert Areas
•
•
Small Town
•
Caution Areas
•
•
Freeways
•
Danger Areas
•
•
Highways
•
Warning Areas
•
•
Roads
•
Large Airports
•
•
•
Railroads
•
Medium Airports
•
•
•
Political Boundaries
•
Prohibited Areas
•
•
•
Traffic Symbols
•
MOAs
•
•
•
Lat/Lon Grids
•
•
Runway Labels
•
•
•
VORs
•
•
Lightning Strike Data
•
•
•
VRPs
•
•
NEXRAD Data
•
•
•
NDBs
•
•
River/Lake Names
•
•
•
•
Class B Airspace
•
•
Traffic Labels
•
•
•
•
Class C Airspace
•
•
Water Detail
•
•
•
•
Class D Airspace
•
•
Active FPL Legs
•
•
•
•
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Large City
Medium City
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Index
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
Table 3-1 Features Shown at Each Decluttering Level
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 3
MFD
Feature
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: Traffic is automatically decluttered from Nav Map pages when the
map scale is above 40 NM.
Sec 1
System
2. While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages, press the DCLTR soft key.
Each successive press of the DCLTR soft key will toggle through the declutter
levels. In the following table, features marked with a “•” are shown at the
indicated Declutter Level. Features shown at level 0 will be displayed at all
Declutter levels.
Foreword
1. There are four levels of decluttering. DCLTR (0) shows the most detail. DCLTR-3
removes the most detail.
3-5
Panning
The Panning Map Page function allows you to move the map beyond its
current limits without adjusting the map scale and to examine information at
the pointer location. When you select the panning function — by pressing the
small MFD knob — a target pointer flashes on the map display. A window also
appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of
the pointer, the ETE from your present position to the pointer, elevation at the
pointer, and bearing and distance to the pointer from your present position.
Information is
related to the tip
of the pointer
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.1.6
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Map Pointer
Figure 3-6 Navigation Map Pointer Location Information
1. While viewing a Map, press the small MFD knob. A flashing pointer will appear
in the tip of the ownship symbol. The measured information is referenced to the
tip of the arrow.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Present Position
Index
Appendix A
Figure 3-7 Navigation Map Initial Pointer Location
2. Turn the large MFD knob to move the cursor horizontally. Turn the small MFD
knob to move the cursor vertically.
3. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel panning. The display will return to
the previous map view.
3-6
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.1.7
Selecting Items on the Map
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
1. While viewing the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group, press the
small MFD knob to activate panning.
Foreword
When the target pointer is placed on an object, the name of that object is
highlighted (even if the name wasn’t originally displayed on the map). This
feature applies to airports, NAVAIDs, user-created waypoints, roads, lakes,
rivers — just about everything displayed on the map except route lines. When
an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint is selected on the map display, you can
review information about the item.
2. Move the cursor with the small and large MFD knobs to highlight a feature.
Sec 3
MFD
3. Press ENT to display information about the highlighted feature.
4. Press one of the soft keys for details of the selected topic.
3.1.8
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
5. Press the small MFD knob again to return to panning.
Measuring Distances
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The “Measure Bearing/Distance” function provides a quick and easy method to
determine the bearing and distance between any two points on the Navigation Map.
1. While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group, press
MENU.
2. Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight “Measure Bearing/
Distance“ and then press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-7
Index
4. Turn the large or small MFD knobs to move the cursor to a reference point. The
distance and bearing is displayed at the top of the display.
Appendix A
Figure 3-9 Measure Distance Starting Reference Point
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-8 Navigation Map Measure Distance Function
3. Your present position will be marked as the starting reference point. To choose
a different starting reference point, turn the large or small MFD knobs to
desired point and press ENT.
Distance and Bearing Between Start and End Points
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Ending Reference
Point position
Starting Reference Point
Figure 3-10 Bearing/Distance Measurement
5. Press the small MFD knob to stop measuring.
3.1.9
Customizing Navigation Map Pages
The Navigation Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page
Menu. The Page Menu options include choices for Map Setup and Measure
Bearing/Distance. The Map Setup choice covers selections for Map, Weather,
Traffic, and Aviation depending on the installed equipment of a given aircraft.
3.1.10
Map Setup
The Map Setup selection from the Page Menu allows you to select which data
will be displayed on the map.
1. While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Ending Reference Point
Index
Figure 3-11 Navigation Map Page Menu
3-8
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
3. Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the Group and press ENT to
allow editing of the selected group. The groups shown depend on the features
available for equipment installed in your aircraft.
Foreword
2. With the cursor flashing on the “Map Setup,” press the ENT key to display the
Map Setup Menu.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-12 Navigation Map Page Menu Map Group Selection
Map Group
Traffic Group
(optional)
Aviation Group
Settings
Menu
Item
Settings
Menu
Item
Adjustment
Menu
Item
Settings
Orientation
North Up
Track Up
DTK Up
HDG Up
NEXRAD
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Traffic
Off
All Traffic
TA/PA
TA Only
Safe Taxi
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
North Up
At
Off/Range
NEXRAD
Cell Mov
Off/Range
Rwy
Extension
Range
Off/Range
Auto Zoom
On/Off
NEXRAD
Legend
On/Off
INT/NDB
Viewing
Range *
Off/Range
Land Data
On/Off
NEXRAD
Source
US/Canada
CONUS/
Regional/
Combined
***
VOR
Viewing
Range*
Off/Range
Track
Vector
Length
Off/Time
XM Ltng
Off/Range
Class B/
TMA *
Off/Range
Wind
Vector
On/Off
Off/Range
Class C/
TCA *
Off/Range
Enhanced
Range
Ring
On/Off
Stormscope
Viewing
Range
Stormscope
Strike/Cell
Mode
Strike/Cell
Class D *
Off/Range
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Menu
Item
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Weather Group
(optional)
Sec 3
MFD
4. Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-9
Settings
Menu
Item
Settings
Topo Data
On/Off
PRECIP
Data
Viewing
Range
Topo Scale
On/Off
Terrain
Data
On/Off
Obstacle
Viewing
Range
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Traffic Group
(optional)
Menu
Item
Aviation Group
Menu
Item
Settings
Off/Range
Restricted*
Off/Range
PRECOP
Legend
On/Off
MOA
(Military)*
Off/Range
DL LTNG
Data
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Other/
ADIZ *
Off/Range
Off/Range
TFR *
Off/Range
Power Line
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Airways
Off/Modes
Lat/Lon
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Smart
Airspace
On/Off
Field of
View**
On/Off
Show
Airspaces
All/Altitude
Selected
Alt Range
Arc
On/Off
Airspace
Labels
On/Off
VRP
Viewing
Range
Off/Range
Sec 1
System
Menu
Item
Sec 2
PFD
Weather Group
(optional)
Sec 3
MFD
Foreword
Map Group
Adjustment
* Shown if the Aviation database is current.
** Shown if Synthetic Vision is available.
*** Shown if FIS-B is NEXRAD weather source.
Table 3-2 Navigation Map Page Menu Selections
3.1.10.1 Map Feature Options
Choose the options to determine the values for display on each Navigation
Map. The options you select will be retained until changed. The options may be
selecting by using the following procedure:
1. While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group, press the
MENU key. With “Map Setup” highlighted, press ENT. With the Map Group
active, turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired option.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
3-10
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 1
System
Map Orientation
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Navigation Map.
Foreword
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-13 Navigation Map Orientation
Index
3-11
Appendix A
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 7
Symbols
Land Data
The Land Data option selects whether detailed land features, such as rivers,
roads, cities, are displayed. Topo features, traffic, terrain, and obstacles will still
be displayed, even with Land Data turned off.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Auto Zoom
With a valid flight plan, the Auto Zoom feature will automatically change the
Navigation Map range depending on the distance to the next waypoint in the
flight plan. If enabled, it will also automatically zoom to the SafeTaxi zoom range
when the aircraft is on the ground. Auto Zoom can be overridden at any time
by manually zooming with the RNG keys or enabling OBS mode. Auto Zoom is
re-enabled during any one of the following conditions:
• The active waypoint changes during flight.
• The aircraft lands.
• OBS mode is disabled.
• The Navigation Map’s Auto Zoom settings are changed.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The North Up At option allows you to select the map range where at and
above the selected value the Map Orientation will automatically change to North
Up. For example, with the 500 NM value selected and the map range of the MFD
is 500 NM or more, the map orientation will automatically become North Up.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
North Up At
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Track Vector Length
When turned on, the Track Vector Length option will show a dashed line
and arrow extending from the aircraft icon illustrating the current Track and the
distance the aircraft will travel in the selected time.
Sec 2
PFD
Track Vector
Aircraft Present Position
Wind Vector
The Wind Vector option when turned on will show a box in the top right
corner of the MFD indicating the wind direction and speed.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
Figure 3-15 Navigation Map Wind Vector Display
Enhanced Range Ring
Sec 7
Symbols
When selected ON, the Enhanced Range Ring function provides a second
ring at 1/2 the distance of the primary ring to allow the pilot to accurately judge
the distance to objects depicted on the map.
Range Ring Radius
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-14 Navigation Map Track Vector
Enhanced Range Ring
Appendix A
Range Ring with Compass Rose
Index
Figure 3-16 Navigation Map Range Ring
3-12
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Topo Data On
Sec 1
System
Topo Data Off
Foreword
Topo Data
The Topo Data option selects whether the colored topographical features are
displayed. Traffic, Land Data, Terrain, and Obstacles will still be displayed even
with Topo Data turned off.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 3-17 Navigation Map Topo Data
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Minimum/Maximum
Range of Topography
Displayed on the Map
Sec 7
Symbols
Sky Indication
Current Aircraft Altitude
Sec 8
Glossary
Range of Topography
Displayed on the Map
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Topo Scale
The Topo Scale option selects whether the elevation scale for topographical
features on the Navigation Map is displayed. The scale will be located on the
right side of the display.
Appendix A
Current Ground Level Indication
Figure 3-18 Navigation Map Topo Scale
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-13
Foreword
Terrain Data
The Terrain Data option selects whether Terrain Data is shown on the
Navigation Map. The Terrain Data Icon
will be shown when Terrain has
been selected.
Terrain Data On
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Terrain Data Off
Terrain Data
Figure 3-19 Navigation Map Terrain Data
Obstacle Data Viewing Range
The Obstacle Data Viewing Range option selects whether the Obstacle Data
is shown on the Navigation Map. Obstacles will be shown at and below the
selected map range. Map ranges above this value will not show the Obstacle
Data.
Obstacles Between 100
and 1000 feet of Aircraft
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain Data Icon
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Obstacles Within 100 feet
or Above Aircraft
Index
Figure 3-20 Navigation Map Obstacle Data
3-14
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Lat/Lon Viewing Range
The Lat/Lon Viewing Range option selects whether Lat/Lon line is shown on
the MFD.
Foreword
Obstacle databases created for software version 7.00 or later may include
HOT lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed. Hazardous
Obstacle Transmission (HOT) Lines are power lines that have been identified as
a potential hazard to aircraft. The installed obstacle database type can be verified
on the System Status page. Power line data is available for the contiguous United
States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Lat/Lon Reference Information
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-21 Navigation Map Lat/Lon Information
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Field of View
The Field of View represented by the synthetic terrain data used for the
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option (when enabled) can be represented
on the MFD Navigation Map Page lateral image. Two dashed lines forming
a V-shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the MFD, represent the forward
viewing area shown on the PFD.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-15
Foreword
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Field of View Borders
Selected Altitude Range Arc
The range to altitude arc may be selected for display on the MFD navigation
map to predict where the ownship will be when it reaches the altitude selected
on the altitude alerter on the PFD. The distance from the ownship to the arc is
based on ground speed, baro altitude, selected altitude, and vertical speed. The
arc is shown when the aircraft is moving toward the selected altitude at a vertical
speed of at least 150 feet per minute. Depending on the zoom range and lateral
distance, the arc disappears when near the ownship icon.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 3-22 Navigation Map Field of View on the MFD
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Selected Altitude
Range Arc
Figure 3-23 Selected Altitude Range Arc
3-16
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.1.10.2
Weather Feature Options (Optional)
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
The Weather group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows
you to customize the NEXRAD Viewing Range, NEXRAD Cell Movement,
and Lightning Viewing range. Weather is an optional feature that requires a
GDL 69/69A and an SiriusXM Weather subscription, or other weather product
(such as Connext Weather).
1. While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 page of the Map page group, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu.
Foreword
NOTE: For steps on how to select a weather source, refer to
section 3.2.1.10.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the Weather Group and press
ENT to allow editing of the selected group. The groups shown depend on the
features available for equipment installed in your aircraft.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. With the cursor flashing on the “Map Setup” option, press the ENT key to
display the Map Setup Menu.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-24 Navigation Map Page Menu
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 3-25 Navigation Map Page Menu Weather Group Selection
4. Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-17
The NEXRAD Viewing Range option selects whether the NEXRAD weather
products is shown on the MFD. NEXRAD weather products will be shown at
and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, NEXRAD weather will
not be shown. Map ranges above the selected value will not show the NEXRAD
weather products. Where 100 NM is selected, the NEXRAD weather products
will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
NEXRAD Cell Movement
The NEXRAD Cell Movement option selects whether NEXRAD Cell Movement
is shown on the Navigation Map.
NEXRAD Legend
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an
abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD.
Figure 3-26 NEXRAD Legend Selection
Data Link Lightning Viewing Range
The Lightning Viewing Range option selects whether the data link provided
Lightning weather products is shown on the Navigation Map. Lightning
weather products will be shown at and below the selected map range. When
Off is selected, Lightning weather will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected,
Lightning symbols will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
3-18
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
XM/FIS-B NEXRAD Source
Foreword
The XM/FIS-B NEXRAD Source selection allows the choice of the available
sources for NEXRAD weather products.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-27 NEXRAD Weather Source Selection
NOTE: StormScope data is displayed on the Map Page only if aircraft
heading is available.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-19
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Appendix A
When the Stormscope Viewing Range option has a range greater than zero,
the Stormscope cells or strikes option is made available and can determine
which type are shown on the Navigation Map.
Sec 8
Glossary
Strike/Cell Mode
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: The G500/G600 will display StormScope data with or without a
heading source. If no heading source is available, the display will indicate
this by placing “HDG N/A” in the upper right portion of the display. If no
heading is available, the pilot must clear the strikes after each heading
change.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: The selected lightning display type, cell or strike, will be shown the
same on both the StormScope and the Map pages.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The Stormscope Viewing Range option selects Stormscope cells or strikes are
shown on the Navigation Map. Products will be shown at and below the selected
map range. When Off is selected, cells or strikes will not be shown. Where
100 NM is selected, symbols will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Stormscope Viewing Range
NOTE: As a decluttering function, traffic labels will not be drawn when
the map scale is above 15 NM and traffic symbols will not be drawn when
the map scale is above 40 NM.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.1.10.3 Traffic Feature Options (Optional)
The Traffic group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to
customize the display of traffic on the Navigation Map. The Traffic function
requires the installation of a compatible traffic device.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Traffic Selection
Off
All Traffic
TA/PA
TA Only
Display Result
No traffic displayed
All types of traffic displayed
Traffic Alerts and Proximity Alerts displayed
Traffic Alerts Only displayed
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 3-3 Navigation Map Traffic Display Options
1. While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Traffic Group active,
turn the large MFD knob to highlight the “Traffic” options.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
When the Traffic overlay is active on a Map page, a Traffic icon will be
displayed on the Map page where it is selected.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-28 Navigation Map Page Menu Traffic Group Selection
3-20
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Traffic Overlay
Smart Key Label
Foreword
Traffic Overlay
Selected Icon
Figure 3-29 Navigation Map Traffic Overlay
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
3.1.10.4 Aviation Feature Options
The Aviation group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to
customize the display of SafeTaxi information, Runway Extensions, Intersection/
NDB locations, VOR locations, and TFR icons on the Navigation Map.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 3-30 Navigation Map Page Menu Aviation Group Selection
Sec 8
Glossary
The Runway Extension Range option selects the whether Runway Extensions
is shown for the flight plan destination airport runway and will extend 10 NM.
Runway Extensions will be shown at and below the selected map range. When
Off is selected, Runway Extensions will not be shown.
Sec 7
Symbols
Runway Extension Range
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The SafeTaxi viewing range option selects the range at which SafeTaxi
information is shown on the Navigation Map. SafeTaxi will be shown at and
below the selected map range. When Off is selected, SafeTaxi information will
not be shown. Where 1 NM is selected, the SafeTaxi information will be shown
at map ranges of 1 NM and lower.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
SafeTaxi Viewing Range
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-21
Sec 1
System
Foreword
INT/NDB Viewing Range
The INT/NDB viewing range option selects whether Intersection and NDB
information is shown on the Navigation Map. Intersection and NDB information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. Where 15 NM is selected, INT/NDBs will be
shown at map ranges of 15 NM and lower.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
VOR Viewing Range
The VOR viewing range option selects whether VOR information is shown
on the Navigation Map. VOR information will be shown at and below the
selected map range. When Off is selected, the information will not be shown.
Where 150 NM is selected, VOR information will be shown at map ranges of
150 NM and lower.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Class B/TMA Airspace Viewing Range
The Class B/TMA airspace viewing range option selects whether Class B/TMA
airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map. Class B/TMA airspace
information will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is
selected, the information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Class B/
TMA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
The Class C/TCA airspace viewing range option selects whether Class C/TCA
airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map. Class C/TCA airspace
information will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is
selected, the information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Class
C/TCA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Class D Airspace Viewing Range
The Class D airspace viewing range option selects whether Class D airspace
information is shown on the Navigation Map. Class D airspace information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Class D airspace
information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Class C/TCA Airspace Viewing Range
3-22
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Restricted Airspace Viewing Range
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The Restricted airspace viewing range option selects whether the map range
is shown on the Navigation Map. Restricted airspace information will be shown
at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the information will
not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Restricted airspace information will
be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
MOA (Military) Viewing Range
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
The MOA (Military) viewing range option selects whether MOA (Military)
information is shown on the Navigation Map. MOA airspace information will
be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, MOA airspace
information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
Other/ADIZ Airspace Viewing Range
3-23
Index
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 8
Glossary
The Airways option allows you to select the airways that are shown on the
Navigation Map. All, Low only, and Hi only Airways may be selected. When Off
is selected, airways will not be shown.
Sec 7
Symbols
Airways
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects
whether TFR information is shown on the Navigation Map. TFR information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, TFR information will
be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower. This optional feature requires an
active data link receiver. TFRs are provided through the data link. Some TFRs
may exist that are not available to the data link provider and as such will not be
displayed.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
TFR Viewing Range (Optional)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The Other/ADIZ airspace viewing range option selects whether Other/ADIZ
airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map. Other/ADIZ airspace
information will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is
selected, the information will not be shown. Where 100 NM is selected, Other/
ADIZ airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower.
NOTE: Smart Airspace only changes the depiction of the airspace on the
moving map display. It does not alter the Airspace Alerts that can be set
on the System-Alerts portion of the system.
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Smart Airspace
The Smart Airspaces selection filters airspaces to show the ones appropriate for
your altitude. Garmin’s Smart Airspace™ feature aids visual clarity on-screen by
de-emphasizing airspace that’s well above or below the aircraft’s current altitude.
The vertical separation is 1,000 feet at sea level and the vertical separation will
gradually increase to 2,000 feet until the aircraft reaches 10,000 feet. Anything
above 10,000 feet keeps the 2,000 feet vertical separation.
Smart Airspaces - Emphasized (On
Figure 3-31 Display of Smart Airspaces (Airspace Borders Grayed When Emphasized)
Show Airspace
The Airspace viewing range options select whether the Airspaces are shown
on the Map and at and below the selected map ranges.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Smart Airspaces - De-Emphasized
Index
Appendix A
Figure 3-32 Display of Smart Airspaces
3-24
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Airspace Labels
Foreword
The Airspace Label feature displays the airspace altitude limits when zoomed
into 15 nm or less.
Sec 1
System
Airspace Labels
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-33 Airspace Labels
Visual Reporting Points
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The Visual Reporting Points (VRPs) viewing range option selects whether VRP
information is shown on the Navigation Map. VRP information will be shown
at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the information will
not be shown. Where 15 NM is selected, the VRPs will be shown for map ranges
at and below 15 NM.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-25
Split Screen (Optional)
External Video is an optional function that displays video provided by an
externally mounted video source on the aircraft.
1. While viewing the Map function, turn the small MFD knob to the third
Navigation Map page.
Current Video Source
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.1.11
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Display of External Video Source
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Map Display
3. To select the other external video source, press the MENU key.
4. Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the Video selection and then
press ENT.
Appendix A
Sec 7
Symbols
2. The External Video page will show the external video on the top half of the
MFD and a Navigation Map will be shown on the lower half.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-34 External Video
Index
Selected Video Source
Figure 3-35 Aux Mode System Setup Page Menu
3-26
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.2
Aux Mode Pages
3.2.1
Foreword
The Aux mode provides pages for System Setup, SiriusXM Information (if
installed), and system Status.
System Settings
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
G500/G600 system settings are managed from the Aux Mode System Setup
Page. The following settings can be changed:
• Display Brightness (Mode and Level)
• Airspeeds (Glide-REF, VR, VX - V1, and VY - V2)
• PFD Options (Wind Vector, Nav Status Styles, CDI/VDI Preview, and Temp
Reference)
• Dual Unit Synchronization (CDI, Baro, and some Databases)
• Date/Time (Date, Time, Time Format, and Time Offset)
• MFD Display Units (Distance/Speed and Altitude/Vertical Speed)
• System Display Units (Navigation Angle Reference, Pressure Units, and
Temperature Units)
• Data Link (FIS, XM, or GFDS for Connext Weather)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Index
Figure 3-36 Aux Mode System Setup Page
3-27
The RA TEST soft key activates the Radar Altimeter test mode. For more
details, refer to section 2.
NOTE: Not all Radar Altimeters have the TEST function.
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
The default values set by the installer during installation are restored by using
the Page Menu options or soft keys. The “Restore Unit Defaults” menu selection
and the DFLT UNIT soft key restores the default MFD Display and System
Display Units settings. The “Restore Airspeed Defaults” menu selection or DFLT
SPD soft key restores the default PFD Airspeeds settings.
Figure 3-37 Aux Mode System Setup Page Menu
2. Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the desired selection and then
press ENT.
3.2.1.1
Display Brightness
Display brightness mode may be set to manual or automatic. The automatic
mode will set the display brightness based on the ambient light. The manual
mode allows the setting of display brightness between 0 and 100%.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to reach the AUX page group. Press the small MFD
knob to activate the cursor.
2. The Level will be highlighted. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Display
Brightness Level and then press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
1. While viewing the Aux mode System Setup page, press the MENU key.
Figure 3-38 Aux Mode Display Brightness Level Selection
3. If the Level was changed, Manual will be selected. Press the cursor to save the
settings. If you press ENT the Mode setting will be highlighted.
3-28
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
4. With the Mode value highlighted, turn the small MFD knob to select Auto or
Manual and then press ENT.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-39 Aux Mode Display Brightness Mode Selection
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: When power is cycled, the Airspeed Reference values are reset.
During preflight, the Airspeed Reference values should be checked and
set appropriately for the current aircraft configuration and performance.
Sec 3
MFD
3.2.1.2
Airspeed Reference Marks
The Best Glide (or REF), Vr, Vx (or V1), and Vy (or V2) airspeed reference
marks for the PFD are adjusted with this function. A marker will appear on the
PFD Airspeed tape at the selected speed when the value is set to “On.” Default
reference airspeeds are set during installation. When power is cycled, the values
you set will be reset to the default values.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 3-40 Airspeed References shown on PFD when activated
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-29
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.1.3
PFD Options - Wind Vector
When selected, wind vector information is displayed on the PFD to the left of
the HSI. Four styles are available.
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
desired Wind Vector value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the style and press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Style 1
Appendix A
Index
Style 3
Style 4
Figure 3-41 Wind Vector Style
3. When a Wind Vector style is selected, a Wind Vector box with the chosen style
will be displayed to the left of the HSI on the PFD. When OFF is selected, the
Wind Vector box will not be displayed.
3.2.1.4
Sec 8
Glossary
Style 2
PFD Options - Nav Status
When selected, Nav Status information is displayed on the PFD either on the
top of the display (Style 1) or to the left of the HSI (Style 2).
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
desired Nav Status value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the style and press ENT.
3-30
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Style 1 - Top of Display
Style 2 - Left of HSI
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-42 Nav Status Style
NOTE: Nav Status option is not available for all installations.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. After the Nav Status style is selected, the chosen style will be displayed on the
PFD.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-31
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.1.5
CDI/VDI Preview
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
CDI/VDI Preview value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select “ON” or “OFF.”
3. Press ENT.
3.2.1.6
Temperature Reference
The computer calculates the temperature based on temperature probe and
Pitot-static inputs. The units (°C or °F) and temperature reference are selected
on the AUX – SYSTEM SETUP page. The temperature reference can be selected
to one of the following choices:
• Static Air Temperature (SAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
stationary (static) outside air. Conceptually, this is the temperature that
would be read on a thermometer floating stationary at the current location.
• Total Air Temperature (TAT) – This is the calculated temperature of the
outside air as it moves past the aircraft, including the rise in temperature
due to air compression and friction at the current airspeed.
• Difference from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) – This is the
difference between SAT and standard (ISA) temperature at the current
altitude. This provides an indication of how much warmer/colder the
temperature is from a “standard” atmosphere.
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
desired Temp Reference value.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Temp Reference type and press ENT.
Index
Figure 3-43 Outside Air Temperature Selection
3-32
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 2
PFD
1. While viewing the first page of the AUX page group, press the small MFD knob
and turn the large MFD knob to highlight “CDI,” “BARO,” “Databases,” or
“Chart Streaming” in the “Synchronization” box in both units.
Sec 1
System
Crossfill synchronization for CDI and Baro Corrections are selected in the
System Setup page of the Aux page group. Database Synchronization is managed
in the DB Sync function on the System Status page of the Aux page group.
Foreword
3.2.1.7
Synchronization
Dual GDU 620 units when connected in the aircraft may be set up to
communicate and share information by “Crossfilling” or synchronizing
information between the two units. A single GDU 620 may be set up to
synchronize the database with a navigator.
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: Chart Streaming appears only when the Databases option is turned on.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-44 Dual Unit Synchronization
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select “ON” or “OFF.”
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Press ENT.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-33
Foreword
The following information is always synchronized between both GDU 620
units:
• Selected Altitude
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
• Selected Heading
• Selected Course
• Selected Vertical Speed
• Airspeed Bug Values
• Airspeed Color Band Values
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
• System Pressure Units
• System Temperature Units
The following information can be synchronized between GDU 620s, or
changed independently, depending on the Crossfill Synchronization Settings:
• Barometric Correction (default ON)
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Selected CDI (default OFF)
When Barometric Correction is synchronized, any changes to the Barometric
Setting on either GDU will change it on both GDUs.
When the CDI is synchronized, any changes to the selected CDI on either
GDU will change it on both GDUs. Either pilot can change the OBS course on
either GPS. If the pilot selects GPS1 on the CDI and GPS1 is in OBS mode, any
course changes will move the OBS on GPS1, GDU1, and GDU2 (if the copilot
has GPS1 displayed on the CDI). Similarly, if the pilot selects GPS2 on the CDI
and GPS2 is in OBS mode, any course changes will move the OBS on GPS2,
GDU1, and GDU2 (if the copilot has GPS2 displayed on the CDI).
AHRS 1 and ADC 1 will only be displayed on GDU1. AHRS2 and ADC2 will
only be displayed on GDU2.
The CDI soft key toggles between selection of GPS or VOR/LOC as the active
navigation source. In a single GDU 620 system, the GDU CDI soft key will
change the source in the connected navigator and making a source change in the
navigator will be reflected in the GDU 620. In a dual GDU 620 system, the CDI
keys in the navigator are disabled.
3-34
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.2.1.8
Date and Time
Foreword
The Date and Time options allow you to select the time to change UTC time
to local time with a time offset.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-45 Time Format and Offset
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select Local 12hr, Local 24hr, or UTC and then
press ENT. When Local 12 or 24 hour mode is selected, the Time Offset value
will then be highlighted.
Sec 7
Symbols
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Time
Format.”
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Table 3-4 U.S. Time Zone Offsets
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Local Daylight Savings
Time Offset
-3 hours
-4 hours
-5 hours
-6 hours
-7 hours
-8 hours
-9 hours
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Atlantic
Eastern
Central
Mountain
Pacific
Alaskan
Hawaiian
Local Standard Time
Offset
-4 hours
-5 hours
-6 hours
-7 hours
-8 hours
-9 hours
-10 hours
Sec 3
MFD
Time Zone
Appendix A
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired offset and then press ENT.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-35
Foreword
Sec 1
System
4. A Time Offset may be entered by using the large and small MFD knobs to
change the values. Press ENT after completing any changes.
5. Press the small MFD knob to exit adjustments.
3.2.1.9
MFD Display Units
The MFD Display Units options allow you to select the units of measurement
conventions displayed on the MFD. Distance and Speed selections are Imperial,
Metric, or Nautical. Altitude and Vertical speed selections are Feet or Meters.
Traffic information is always shown in Nautical Miles (distance) and Feet
(altitude).
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
Distance and Speed (DIS, SPD) units of measurement.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-46 Date and Time Values
Figure 3-47 Distance and Speed MFD Display Units
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select Imperial, Metric, or Nautical and then press
ENT. The Altitude and Vertical Speed units selection will now be highlighted.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select Feet or Meters and then press ENT.
3-36
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 3-48 Altitude and Vertical Speed MFD Display Units
System Display Units
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
CAUTION: The Nav Angle display units (Magnetic or True) must be set to
the same type in both the GDU 620 and GPS navigators.
Sec 3
MFD
The System Display Units options allows the selection of units to display
values for Navigation Angle (Magnetic or True), Barometric Setting (inches or
Hectopascals), and Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius). Pressing the DFLT
UNIT soft key will restore the Default Unit settings.
1. While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
System Display Units selection titled “Nav Angle.”
Sec 2
PFD
3.2.1.10
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-49 Nav Angle System Display Units
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select Magnetic or True and then press ENT.
The Barometric Pressure Setting value will now be highlighted. When True is
selected, a "T" will appear to the right of the heading value on the PFD.
Appendix A
Index
Figure 3-50 Barometric Setting System Display Units
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-37
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Barometric Setting units and then press
ENT. The Temperature value will now be highlighted.
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-51 Temperature System Display Units
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Temperature units and then press ENT.
Data Link
The Data Link WX/TFR Source menu allows users to select the source of
weather that is displayed on the MFD. Only the options that are installed will
be displayed.
Figure 3-52 WX/TFR Source Options
To select a weather source:
1. Open the System Setup page of the AUX page group.
2. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the WX/TFR Source field.
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select XM, GFDS, or FIS-B, and then press ENT.
5. Press the small MFD knob to exit adjustments.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3.2.1.11
3-38
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.2.2
SiriusXM Information (Optional)
Foreword
The Aux mode XM Information page displays information about the SiriusXM
Satellite radios, service, and products when the GDL 69/69A is installed and the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is activated.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-53 XM Information
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-39
SiriusXM Entertainment Radio (Optional)
Audio entertainment is available through the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A. The GDU 620 serves
as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A. SiriusXM
Satellite Radio allows you to enjoy a variety of radio programming over long
distances without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signal
from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. When enabled,
the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in Aux Mode.
The information on the SiriusXM Satellite Radio display is composed of
four areas: the Active Channel, Available Channels, Category of the highlighted
Channel, and the Volume setting. The Active Channel window shows the
Channel Name and Number, Artist, Song Title, and Category.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the AUX page group.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to the XM Radio page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.3
Figure 3-54 XM Entertainment Radio
A description of SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is provided in
section 5.
3-40
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.2.4
System Status
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The System Status Page displays the statuses, serial numbers, and software
version numbers for all detected system LRUs. Pertinent information on all
system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks; failed LRUs by red “X’s.” Failed LRUs should be noted and a service
center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed. Database SYNC allows a database
to be synchronized with more than two LRUs (G500/G600 and GTNs) at once.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 3-55 LRU and Database Information
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-41
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the AUX page group.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to the System Status page.
3. Press the LRU soft key to highlight the first item in the LRU Info window.
4. Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the items in the LRU Info window
in case more items are available than are displayed. If more items are available
than can be displayed in the window, a scroll bar will show on the right side of
the window.
5. Press the DB ACTV soft key to display the active databases.
6. Press the DB SYNC soft key to display the status of Database SYNC operations.
The synchronization happens automatically regardless of whether the soft key
is used.
3.2.4.1
Database Sync Operation
Database SYNC allows the G500/G600 to synchronize databases from a
single unit. The pilot only needs to update a single database card and the new
databases are automatically SYNC’d through the units connected in the cockpit
and configured for Database Syncing.
The following databases can be synchronized between using Database SYNC:
• Navigation
• Chartview (when support is
added by Jeppesen)
• Obstacle
• SafeTaxi
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory
• Basemap
When Database SYNC is enabled in the LRUs and a database card is inserted
that is created for Database SYNC, the G500/G600 will coordinate with the
other LRUs in the cockpit to determine which unit has the newest databases.
Once the determination has occurred, the connected LRUs will begin to
transfer the databases. This process may take several minutes. Charts are meant
to be transferred while in-flight, before the new chart database is effective,
as this could take an hour or more. The status of the database transfers to a
unit can be viewed in the System Status function on the DB SYNC page. The
G500/G600 will display the source of the received databases. If a database transfer
is pending, completed, or not authorized, the status will also be indicated.
3-42
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
When the transfer is complete, if there are new and current databases to
be used, and if the aircraft is stopped and has yet to take-off, the pilot will be
prompted with the option to restart the unit that contains the new databases.
NOTE: This feature is available in SW Versions 7.00, and later.
Sec 1
System
NOTE: Restarting the G500/G600 must only be performed when the aircraft
is on the ground as navigation and communication from the restarted unit
will be lost for a period of time.
Sec 2
PFD
1. With the G500/G600 turned off, insert the database card.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. On the System Status page, press the DB SYNC soft key to view the transfer
process.
Sec 3
MFD
2. Turn the G500/G600 on. The Database SYNC will occur automatically in the
background. During the Database SYNC process, normal operation of the
G500/G600 is not affected.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Index
Figure 3-56 One Database Transfer In Process and One Pending
3-43
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-57 Database Transfer Complete
Figure 3-58 Database Transfer Not Authorized and DB Sync Conflict
3-44
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
5. Press the Restart soft key to continue updating the database.
Foreword
4. Once all of the database transfers have completed, if the
G500/G600 determines that at least one of the newly transferred databases
is effective and the aircraft is on the ground and stopped prior to a flight, a
pop-up and confirmation will be presented to restart the unit. No pop-up will
appear if the aircraft is moving or has been in the air since the unit was turned
on.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-59 System Restart - Step 1
Sec 8
Glossary
WARNING: The unit will reset and all GPS navigation and moving map
functions may be lost while the unit regains GPS position.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-45
Resolving Database Conflicts
If the G500/G600 determines that there are multiple LRUs with the newest
cycle of a database, but they have different regions or types of that database
(i.e., Fixed-wing vs. Rotorcraft navigation database, different regions of the
navigation database, or different obstacle database types) then a database conflict
will occur. When a database conflict occurs, that database will not be SYNC’d
until the pilot resolves the conflict. Initiate the resolve conflicts function on the
unit that contains the databases which the pilot wishes to use. These databases
will then be sent to other units.
1. Press the DB SYNC soft key, and then select the Resolve Conflicts function
on the LRU with the desired databases.
Figure 3-60 Database Conflicts
2. Select YES to continue and push the database to all other LRUs.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.4.2
Figure 3-61 Confirm Database Sync
3-46
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
3. Once sync’d, the desired database will be SYNC’d to the other LRUs and
“Initiating” will be displayed on the Sync Conflicts window.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-62 Database Conflicts Resolved (Initiating)
Chart Streaming
Sec 7
Symbols
While the chart database is synchronizing in the background, the GDU will
stream individual charts to other compatible displays. This enables all Garmin
displays to use the latest chart database information even though the database
is currently installed only on a single unit. Chart Streaming will not begin until
after the chart database has begun synchronizing.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3.2.4.3
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-47
ADS-B/FIS-B Status (Optional)
When an optional ADS-B/FIS-B receiver is installed, the ADS-B/FIS-B Status
page will show the status of satellite communications, FIS-B weather products,
and the traffic applications.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.5
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-63 ADS-B/FIS-B Status Page
3-48
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.2.6
External Video (Optional)
Foreword
External Video is an optional function that displays video provided by an
externally mounted video source on the aircraft.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the Aux page group.
Sec 1
System
2. The External Video page is the first page in the Aux page group.
Sec 2
PFD
Display of External Video Source
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Current Zoom Level
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Current Setup Values For
The Selected Video Source
Sec 7
Symbols
Video Source Selections
Video Source Setup
Full Screen Mode
Figure 3-64 External Video
Select Video Source
2. Press the Video 2 soft key to select Video 2 source for viewing and setup.
Appendix A
If more than one video source is available, the Video 1 and Video 2 soft keys
will be available at the bottom of the display.
1. Press the Video 1 soft key to select Video 1 source for viewing and setup.
Sec 8
Glossary
3.2.6.1
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-49
Foreword
Sec 1
System
3.2.6.2
Zoom
1. While viewing the External Video function, press the Up Rng Arrow key to
increase the zoom up to 10x magnification. Zoom level is made through digital
magnification.
2. Press the Down Rng Arrow key to decrease the zoom level down to a
minimum of 1x.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob clockwise to pan up (the map will move down).
3. Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise to pan down (the map will move
up).
4. Turn the large MFD knob clockwise to pan to the right (the map will move left).
5. Turn the large MFD knob counterclockwise to pan to the left (the map will
move right).
6. Press the small MFD knob to exit panning.
3.2.6.4
Setup
The display of each video source is set up individually.
1. While viewing the External Video page, press the soft key for the desired Video
source (Video 1 or Video 2).
2. Press the Setup soft key.
3. The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Use the following directions
for each value.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3.2.6.3
Panning
1. While viewing the External Video function, press the small MFD knob to
activate panning.
Sec 3
MFD
3. Pressing the FULL soft key toggles between a half and full page view.
Figure 3-65 External Video Setup
4. After selecting the desired settings, press the small MFD knob or the Setup
soft key to exit editing.
3-50
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
2. The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Turn the small MFD knob to
adjust the Brightness value.
Foreword
Brightness Adjustment
1. While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source, press the
Setup soft key.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-66 External Video Brightness Adjustment
3. After selecting the desired setting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
next value or press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
Sec 3
MFD
Contrast Adjustment
1. While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source, press the
Setup soft key.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Contrast value. Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Contrast
value.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-67 External Video Contrast Adjustment
Sec 8
Glossary
3. After selecting the desired setting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
next value or press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-51
Foreword
Sec 1
System
2. The Current value for Brightness will be selected. Turn the large MFD knob
to highlight the Saturation value. Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the
Saturation value.
Figure 3-68 External Video Saturation Adjustment
3. After selecting the desired setting, press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
3.2.6.5
Restore Defaults
The Restore Defaults selection will return the Brightness, Contrast, and
Saturation values to their original settings.
1. While viewing the External Video page, press the MENU key.
Figure 3-69 Restore Video Defaults Menu Selection
2. "Restore Defaults" will be highlighted. Press the ENT key.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Saturation Adjustment
1. While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source, press the
Setup soft key.
3-52
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
1. While viewing the External Video page, press the FULL key.
Foreword
3.2.6.6
Full Screen
The Full selection allows selection of the part of the video information for
display.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selected Display Area
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Window of the
Selected Display Area
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Full Screen Mode
Figure 3-70 Full Video Selection
2. Press the small MFD knob to activate the selection window.
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Turn the large MFD key to move the selection window.
Sec 8
Glossary
4. Press the small MFD knob to accept the selected display area shown in the
window.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-53
Foreword
3.2.7
Position Reporting (Optional)
Position Reporting is a system which collects system variables and transmits
them over the Iridium® satellite at a given interval through the GSR 56.
NOTE: The GSR 56 does not report its serial number until 90 seconds after
power up of the GDU. As a result, for that period, the product info for the
GSR 56 will show "Waiting."
Time Until Transmit
The Time Until Transmit field is a countdown timer that shows the time until
the next data transmission. This field is blank when the aircraft is on the ground.
Countdown Time Until Transmit
Figure 3-71 Position Reporting Time Until Transmit
Position Reporting Status
Position Reporting will be enabled when the aircraft is in the air.
Status
Idle
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Status
The Status window shows the time until the next data transmission and the
status of the reporting system.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
3.2.7.1
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Initializing
Transferring
Unavailable
Description
The reporting system is not using the GSR 56 for reporting at
this time.
The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing.
A position report is currently being transmitted.
The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the reporting system.
Table 3-5 Position Reporting Status
3.2.7.2
Report Type
Standard
When the Standard reporting type is used, the Position Reporting Period may
be set to Off or Automatic. The Automatic Position Reporting Period can be set
to intervals of 2 to 60 minutes.
3-54
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2. Press the small MFD knob to select the Report Type.
Foreword
1. Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group. Turn the small MFD
knob to reach the Position Reporting page.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Standard and then press the ENT key.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-72 Select Standard Reporting
Sec 5
Additional
Features
5. Turn the small MFD knob to select the reporting frequency.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4. The Position Reporting Period type will now be selected. Turn the small MFD
knob to highlight "Off" or "Automatic" and then press the ENT key. The
Position Reporting Period interval will now be selected.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-73 Select Standard Reporting Period Frequency
SEND Soft Key Label
Index
SEND Soft Key
Figure 3-74 Press SEND to Override the Reporting Period
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Appendix A
7. With the Standard Reporting Type, the reporting period may be manually
overridden by pressing the SEND soft key to send data.
Sec 8
Glossary
6. Press the small MFD knob to exit editing.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-55
The G500/G600 system, when combined with a GSR 56 Iridium data link,
can send position reports that contain data as required by the U.S. Government
Automated Flight Following system. The GSR 56 account will allow configuration
to forward data to the Automated Flight Following system.
1. While viewing the Position Reporting function, press the small MFD knob to
select the Report Type.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight "AFF" and then press the ENT.
Figure 3-75 Select Automatic Flight Following (AFF) Reporting Type
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select "OFF" or the default "Every 2 Min" value.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Automatic Flight Following (AFF)
Index
Appendix A
Figure 3-76 Select AFF Reporting Period Frequency
3-56
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.2.8
Iridium Phone Operation (Optional)
Status
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Description
The Iridium phone is not using the GSR 56 for communicating
at this time.
Initializing
The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing.
Connected
The GSR 56 is connected to the called number.
Connecting Call The GSR 56 is in the process of connecting to the called
number.
Changing Volume The volume level on the GSR 56 is changing.
Busy
The phone is in use by another service and the call may not be
made.
Dialing
The GSR 56 is dialing the called number.
Incoming Call A call is being made to the GSR 56.
Hanging Up
The GSR 56 is disconnecting from the current call.
Unavailable
The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the Iridium phone system.
Sec 3
MFD
Status
Idle
Sec 2
PFD
The Status section shows the Call Time, Phone Status, and Call Suppression
selected. The Call Time value shows the length of the call time for the current
call using the Iridium phone. Phone Status shows the current operating status
of the Iridium phone.
Sec 1
System
3.2.8.1
Foreword
Optional satellite telephone operation is available through the Iridium®
satellite system that is interfaced through the Garmin GSR 56.
Table 3-6 Iridium Phone Status
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-57
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Press the small MFD knob to select the Call Suppression type.
Status
Off
Description
Call Suppression is turned off. Calls may be transmitted and
received through the Iridium phone.
On
Call Suppression is turned on. The incoming call pop-up will not
be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page.
Outgoing calls are not affected.
On During APR/ Call Suppression is turned on during Approach, Missed Approach,
MAPR/TERM and Terminal operations. The incoming call pop-up will not
be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page.
Outgoing calls are not affected.
Table 3-7 Call Suppression
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired selection.
Figure 3-77 Select Call Suppression
4. Press the ENT key. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection
cursor.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Call Suppression controls calling when use of the Iridium phone system is
allowed.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group. Turn the small MFD
knob to reach the Iridium Phone page.
3-58
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.2.8.2
Managing the Phone Book
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. If items already exist in the catalog, turn the large MFD knob to select the
Phone Book Catalog icon. Then, turn the small MFD knob to display the
contents of the Phone Book Catalog and highlight the New Entry selection and
press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to highlight the Name item in the Phone Book. The Name field will blink.
Sec 1
System
Creating Phone Number Names
1. Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group. Turn the small MFD
knob to reach the Iridium Phone page.
Foreword
The Phone Book is stored on the SD card in the bottom slot. The Phone Book
will only be available for use when the SD card is in the bottom slot. The Phone
Book may hold up to 128 entries. A phone number may be entered and dialed
without saving it to the Phone Book. Note that it is necessary to dial a “1,” the
area code, and then the number.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
"New Entry" Selected for
Phone Book Catalog Entry
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-78 "New Entry" Selected for Phone Book Catalog Entry
Sec 7
Symbols
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select the first character of the name and then turn
the large MFD knob to select the next character. When the name is complete,
press the ENT key.
Sec 8
Glossary
Index
Figure 3-79 Phone Book Name Entry
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
Phone Book
Catalog
Entry Name
3-59
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Creating Phone Numbers with the Rotary Knobs
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the Phone Number field. Turn the small MFD knob
to select the first character of the number and then turn the large MFD knob
to select the next character. When the number is complete, press the ENT key.
Phone Book
Catalog
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Entry Number
Figure 3-80 Phone Book Number Entry
2. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor.
Creating Phone Numbers with Soft Keys
1. Numbers may also be entered using the soft keys at the bottom of the display.
Press the Keys key at the bottom of the display.
Press To Use Keys
For Number Entry
Figure 3-81 Phone Book Number Entry Using Hot Keys
2. Press the key for the group of desired numbers.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Press To Use Keys
For Number Entry
3-60
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Press for
Press for
Press for
numbers 1, numbers 5, numbers 9 and
2, 3, and 4 6, 7, and 8 0, and symbols
* and #
Figure 3-82 Selecting Numeric Groups for Phone Book Number Entry
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Phone Book icon.
When Highlighted,
turn small MFD
knob to view list.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selecting a Phone Book Catalog Entry
1. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon.
Sec 3
MFD
Press Keys For
Number Entry
Figure 3-83 Selecting Individual Numbers for Phone Book Number Entry
Sec 2
PFD
3. Press the key for the desired number. Repeat as necessary and then press ENT
when the number is complete.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog
and highlight the desired entry.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-84 Selecting the Phone Book Catalog
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Selected Phone
Book Catalog Entry
Figure 3-85 Selected Phone Book Catalog Entry
Appendix A
3. Press the ENT key. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection
cursor.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-61
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
2. Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog
and highlight the desired entry. Press ENT to select the catalog entry.
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the DELETE key. Press ENT to delete the
catalog entry. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor.
Editing a Phone Book Catalog Entry
1. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog
and highlight the desired entry. Press ENT to select the catalog entry.
3. Use the large MFD and small MFD knobs to make changes to the name or
number. Press ENT to save the changes. Press the small MFD knob again to
cancel the selection cursor.
3.2.8.3
Phone Volume
Use the Phone Volume controls to adjust the loudness of the phone calls
you hear. Volume controls will only be available when the Idle, Connected, or
Changing Volume states are displayed.
Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Rotary Knobs
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, press the small MFD knob and then
turn the large MFD knob to select the Volume control. The volume bar graph
will blink when selected.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to set the desired volume level.
3. Press the ENT key. Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection
cursor.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Deleting a Phone Book Catalog Entry
1. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD
knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon.
3-62
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Press to Dial
Selected
Number
Press to Select
Volume Keys
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-86 Select Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment
Sec 1
System
Phone Volume
Level Bar Graph
Foreword
Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Soft Keys
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, press the VOL key at the bottom of the
display.
2. Press the VOL + or VOL – keys as necessary to adjust the phone volume.
Sec 3
MFD
Press to
Attenuate
or Mute
Press to
Decrease
Phone Volume
Press to
Increase Phone
Volume
Press to Show
Previous List of
Soft Keys
3. Pressing the ATT soft key will attenuate the volume. Press the ATT soft key
again to return to the previous volume.
Sec 8
Glossary
3. After completing the call, press the HANG UP key.
Sec 7
Symbols
2. Press the DIAL key.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3.2.8.4
Making a Phone Call
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, enter a phone number, or select one
from the Phone Book catalog.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-87 Using Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Press to Dial
Selected
Number
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-63
Answering a Phone Call
An incoming phone call will generate a pop-up announcing the call. When
a call is accepted, the pop-up will show that the call is connected and the
cumulative call time will be shown.
1. When an incoming call is available, press the ENT key or the ANSWER soft
key to answer the call. Or, press the CLR key or the HANG UP soft key to not
answer the call and hang up.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3.2.8.5
2. After a called is accepted and connected, the connection time will be shown
on the pop-up. Press the ATT soft key to attenuate the call volume; pressing
it again will return to normal volume. Press the HANG UP soft key to end the
call. Press the VOL - or VOL + keys to adjust the call volume.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-88 Incoming Call Pop-Up
Figure 3-89 Connected Call Pop-Up
3-64
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.3
Flight Plan Pages
Use the Flight Plan page group to view details about your flight plan route.
The Flight Plan Function shows the Current Flight Plan that is active in the
navigation source displayed on the CDI.
Foreword
3.3.1
Sec 1
System
Active Flight Plan Page
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Graphic METARs
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Digital Chart
Available
for Waypoint
Sec 3
MFD
DTK, Distance, and ETA
from the Previous Leg
Sec 2
PFD
The Active Flight Plan box shows all of the legs of your flight plan with
the current leg indicated in magenta. Listed are each leg with the Desired
Track (DTK), Distance (DIS), and Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) for the legs.
METARs are shown for waypoints in the flight plan. In the Minimums window,
the source and selected value are shown. For details about Minimum Descent
Altitude or Decision Height, refer to section 2.4.4. In the Active Leg Info box in
the lower part of the display, the Course with beginning and ending waypoints,
Active Leg En Route Safe Altitude (ESA), and Route ESA are shown. METAR
information is in section 4.
Current Leg
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Flight Plan Legs
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Baro
Minimums
Window
Active Leg
Window
Index
Figure 3-90 Flight Page 1 (Active Flight Plan)
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-65
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
3.3.1.1
Active Flight Plan Detail
The active flight plan is shown on the first page of the Flight Plan page group.
Further information may be available for each waypoint as shown by the INFO
or WX soft keys. The WX soft key will only appear if a data link receiver is
installed and there is a Weather subscription.
1. Press the MFD knob and then use the large and small MFD knobs to highlight
waypoints in the flight plan.
2. Press the INFO soft key, if available, to view information about the highlighted
waypoint.
4. Press the small MFD knob to return to the Active Flight Plan page.
3.3.1.2
Active Flight Plan Options
The Active Flight Plan page provides information for the flight plan currently
in use for navigation.
To change data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan Page of the FPL page group, press MENU
to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Change Fields?” and then press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
3. Press the WX soft key, if available, to view SiriusXM weather information about
the highlighted waypoint.
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the field you wish to change.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-91 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Option Selection
Figure 3-92 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Change Fields Option Selection
3-66
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired data item and press ENT.
Foreword
5. Press the small MFD knob to remove the cursor.
To restore factory default settings for data fields on the Active Flight Plan
Page:
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan Page of the FPL page group, press MENU
to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Restore Defaults?” and then press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-93 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Option Selection to Restore Defaults
Index
4. Press ENT to activate the selected value.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
Figure 3-95 Minimums Altitude Selection
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 8
Glossary
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Altitude Minimums value. Turn the
large and small MFD knobs to change the Altitude Minimums value.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-94 Minimums Source Selection
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. With the Minimums Source highlighted, select the Altitude Minimums Alerter
source with small MFD knob.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1. While viewing the Charts Page of the FPL page group, press the Menu key.
With the Set Minimums item highlighted, press ENT.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3.3.1.3
Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts
(if interfaced to an audio panel) when approaching the Selected Altitude. For
additional details about Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting,
refer to section 2.4.4.
3-67
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: If you highlight the Minimums Altitude field on the FPL page and
press the CLR key, it will turn the minimums functionality off.
3.3.2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Waypoint Information Page
The Waypoint Information page provides details about a particular waypoint.
You can show a waypoint by selecting it by Ident, Facility Name, or by City.
The Map window shows the selected waypoint in the center of the map. The
Range keys zoom in and out on the map. The Info window at the bottom of
the display shows the Bearing and Distance from your present position to the
selected waypoint as well as its region and Lat/Lon coordinates.
Facility Identifier
Facility Name
Facility Location
Facility Type
Bearing & Distance
to Wpt from
Present Position
Map Region
Lat/Lon
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
In dual installations, the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from
either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units.
Map Window
Wpt Weather
Info Soft Key
Airport Directory Soft Key
Info/Map Soft Key
Rwy/Freq Soft Key
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Map Orientation
Figure 3-96 Flight Plan Waypoint Info/Map Page
Index
NOTE: Waypoint information is shown on the second page of the Flight
Plan page group.
3-68
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
3.3.2.1
Selecting a Waypoint
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information Info/Map page of the FPL page group,
press the MFD knob and use the large and small MFD knobs to move the
cursor to select the identifier for the waypoint.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 3-97 Waypoint Selection - Info/Map Page
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. Press the ENT key to select the waypoint.
OR
Sec 7
Symbols
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information Info/Map page of the FPL page group,
press the small MFD knob.
2. Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Index
Figure 3-98 Waypoint Category Selection
3-69
4. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired airport, and then press ENT.
OR
1. While viewing Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the MAP page group, press the MFD
knob and use the large and small MFD knobs to move the cursor to select the
identifier for the waypoint.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3. Turn the small MFD knob to show FPL, NRST, or RECENT.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selected
Waypoint
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Selection
Cursor
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-99 Waypoint Selection - Nav Map Page
2. Press the ENT key to select the waypoint.
3-70
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.3.2.2
Waypoint/Runway/Frequency Information Detail
Foreword
Sec 1
System
More detailed information about a selected waypoint is available by pressing
the RWY/FREQ or APT DIR soft keys on the Waypoint Information page.
The current destination waypoint is the default item shown. You may select
a different Ident, Facility, or Location. In the Runway window, you may view
information about the runways. In the Frequency window, a scroll bar is shown
on the right side of the window when more frequencies are available.
Sec 2
PFD
Facility
Information
Window
Sec 3
MFD
Runway
Information
Window
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Airport
Frequency
Window
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 3-100 Flight Plan Waypoint Info Detail
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-71
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Ident/Facility/City Selection
The current destination Identifier, Facility Type with icon, Facility Name, and
City (location) are shown in the top window of the Flight Plan mode Waypoint
Information page. The default is the Nearest airport if there is no active flight plan.
Access (Public/
Private and
Symbol)
Identifier
Facility Name
City
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press
the RWY/FREQ, APT DIR, or WX soft keys to view information about the
waypoint.
2. The current destination Ident, Facility, and City is shown, but may be changed
to find information about other choices. Press the small MFD knob to activate
the cursor. These fields may not be selected if the RWY, APT DIR, or WX pages
are selected. If viewing those pages, press the soft key for that page again to
return to the Waypoint Information page.
3. Use the large MFD knob to highlight the field you wish to change and use the
small MFD knob to change the value.
4. Press the ENT key to save the selected value or press the small MFD knob to
cancel editing.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 3-101 Flight Plan Ident/Facility/City Detail
3-72
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
Arrow Indicates
More Runways
Runway Surface
Runway Number
Runway Length
& Width
Lighting Information
Foreword
Runway Information Selection
Information is provided for each runway showing the following detail:
runway number, runway length, surface type, and the frequency for PilotControlled Lighting (PCL).
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 3-102 Waypoint Runway Information
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel editing.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Frequency window at the bottom of the Waypoint Information page
shows the frequencies available for the selected waypoint. A scroll bar is shown
on the right side of the Frequency window if more frequencies are available.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Facility Frequency Selection
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Use the large MFD knob to highlight the Runway and use the small MFD knob
to display the available runways.
Sec 3
MFD
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
RWY/FREQ soft key to view information about the waypoint and press the
small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 3-103 Waypoint Frequency Information
Appendix A
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
RWY/FREQ soft key to view information about the waypoint and then press
the small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the available frequencies.
Index
3. Press the small MFD knob to exit.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-73
The Airport Directory lists extensive information about the selected airport
and the surrounding area. The RWY/FREQ and APT DIR soft keys are inactive
unless the selected waypoint is an airport or heliport.
NOTE: Airport Directory information comes from a database provided by
various 3rd parties. For details on the installed Airport Directory database,
refer to the Database information in the AUX – SYSTEM STATUS page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
Airport Directory
Sec 1
System
3.3.2.3
Figure 3-104 Airport Directory Information
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
APT DIR soft key to view more information about the waypoint.
2. Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor.
3. Use the small or large MFD knob to scroll through the information.
4. Press the small MFD knob to deactivate the cursor. Press the APT DIR soft key
again to return to the Waypoint Information page.
3-74
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3.3.2.4
Waypoint Weather Information (Optional)
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The Weather information function is available if a data link receiver is installed
and weather information is available for the selected waypoint. METAR and TAF
text are displayed on the Waypoint Weather Information Page. Pressing the
WX/NOTAM soft key will show the weather information page. Highlighting the
Product selection and turning the small MFD knob will display METAR data,
Terminal Area Forecast (TAF) information, and NOTAMs as they are available.
NOTAMs are also available when FIS-B is available.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 3-105 Waypoint Weather Information (Textual METARs and TAFs)
3. Press the small MFD knob to return to the main Flight Plan page.
Charts Page (Optional)
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
3-75
Index
When the Chart function is available, charts will be shown on the third page
of the Flight Plan page group.
For more information, refer to section 5.1.
Appendix A
3.3.3
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Use the small MFD knob or the large MFD knob to scroll through the available
information.
Sec 7
Symbols
1. While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group, press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
3-76
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Foreword
The G500/G600 hazard avoidance features are designed to provide advisory
information of potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain,
and air traffic.
Sec 1
System
This section is divided into the following groups:
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity
Sec 2
PFD
• TAWS-B (Optional)
• Terrain-SVT (Optional)
Sec 3
MFD
Traffic Avoidance
• Traffic Advisory System (Optional)
• ADS-B (Optional - ADS-B/FIS-B receiver required)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Weather
• GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Weather (Optional)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Traffic Information Service (TIS) (Optional - GTX 33/330 Transponder
required)
• Weather Radar (Optional)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Connext Weather with the Iridium satellite system through GSR 56
(Optional)
• FIS-B Weather with ADS-B/FIS-B receiver (Optional)
Sec 7
Symbols
• Stormscope (Optional)
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-1
Terrain Configurations
The following terrain awareness configurations and alerting are available in
the G500/G600 system:
• TAWS-B - A system developed to meet the terrain alerting and ground
proximity requirements for Class B TAWS systems as defined in TSO-C151c.
Garmin’s G500/G600 Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-B) is
an optional feature and is intended to provide the flight crew with both
aural and visual alerts to aid in preventing inadvertent Controlled Flight
Into Terrain (CFIT).
• Terrain-SVT - Refers to a subset of Class B TAWS that will meet the terrain
alerting requirements outlined in Section 7.b of AC 23-26. Terrain-SVT is
a subset of Class B TAWS that provides a Class B TAWS FLTA functionality,
including visual alerting and aural alerting. Terrain-SVT is provided with
the Synthetic Vision functionality and not marketed separately.
NOTE: Terrain-SVT is not a fully functional TAWS and does not meet the
TAWS TSO-C151c.
• Terrain-Proximity - Refers to the display of the relative terrain elevations
on the moving map. No aural or visual alerts of any type are provided by a
Terrain-Proximity configuration.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.1
4-2
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.1.1
Terrain System Self-Test
G500/600
G500/600
G500/600
GNS
-
-
GNS
GTN
GTN
GTN
GTN
-
-
-
3rd-party
TAWS
G500/G600
G500/G600
G500/G600
G500/G600
Sec 7
Symbols
G500/600
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
-
Sec 5
Additional
Features
-
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
-
Sec 3
MFD
-
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Terrain Proximity
w/no other
system
Synthetic Vision
w/no other system
Terrain Proximity
or Synthetic
Vision w/GNS
TAWS [3] [5]
Terrain Proximity
or Synthetic
Vision w/GTN
TAWS or Terrain
Alerting [2] [3] [4]
Terrain Proximity
or Synthetic
Vision w/3rdparty TAWS [5]
G500/G600
TAWS-B
Aural
Callouts
Sec 1
System
Terrain
Configuration
Alert Source
MFD
PFD
SVT Terrain/
Terrain/
Annunciator Obstacle
Obstacle
Text
Shading [1]
Alerts
Foreword
During power-up of the GDU 620, the terrain/obstacle database versions are
displayed along with a disclaimer. At the same time, the Terrain system self-test
begins. A failure message is issued if the terrain test fails (a message will not be
issued for Terrain Proximity).
Table 4-1 G500/G600 Terrain Annunciations
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-3
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
GNS/GTN TAWS may be provided by a GNS 500WT-series or GTNseries navigator with TAWS. The GNS/GTN TAWS must be interfaced to the
G500/G600 as GPS 1.
Each of the terrain awareness configurations are detailed in the following
sections.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
[1] SVT Terrain/Obstacle shading is only available when SVT is enabled and displayed.
[2] Depending on configuration, some installations may behave similarly to the GNS.
[3] If the GNS or GTN alerting source is unavailable while Synthetic Vision is enabled,
the G500/600 will revert to Synthetic Vision w/no other system. An advisory message
indicates when reversion to Terrain-SVT alerting has occurred.
[4] For GTN TAWS, GTN sw v5.10 or later and GDU sw v7.00 or later are required. For
prior versions, see Synthetic Vision w/GNS TAWS.
[5] Prior to GDU sw v7.00, SVT Shading and MFD Alerts were generated by the
G500/600 when Synthetic Vision was enabled and a GNS TAWS or 4rd-party TAWS was
installed and generating the PFD Annunciation and Aural Callouts.
4-4
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.2
Terrain Proximity
4.2.1
Sec 2
PFD
• The system must have a valid 3-D GPS position solution.
• The system must have valid terrain/obstacle databases.
Terrain Proximity Limitations
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
WARNING: The data contained in the TERRAIN databases comes from
government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the
data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Terrain uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government
sources. The displayed information should never be understood as being
all-inclusive.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database
that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain information should be used as an aid
to situational awareness. Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid
terrain.
Sec 3
MFD
Terrain Proximity displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude
of the aircraft. The displayed terrain is advisory in nature only. Individual
obstructions may be shown if available in the database. However, all obstructions
may not be available in the database and data may be inaccurate. Never use this
information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles.
Sec 8
Glossary
4.2.2
Sec 1
System
Terrain Proximity requires the following to operate properly:
Foreword
Garmin Terrain Proximity is a non-TSO-C151c terrain awareness system
provided as a standard feature of GDU 620 to increase situational awareness
and help reduce controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Terrain Proximity may be
displayed on the Map page group Navigation Map and Terrain pages.
Terrain System Status
Appendix A
The Terrain system continually monitors several system-critical items, such
as database validity, hardware status, and GPS status. Should the system detect a
failure, a failure message will be displayed.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-5
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.2.3
Displaying Terrain Proximity
The Terrain Proximity page is in the Map page group. Terrain is also selectable
on the Navigation Map pages.
4.2.3.1
Terrain Proximity Page Display on the Terrain Page
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to the Terrain page.
3. Press the VIEW soft key to show the 360 and ARC soft keys.
Altitude
Information
Map Orientation
Sec 3
MFD
North Indication
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Range Rings
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Ownship Symbol
at Present Position
Terrain and
Obstacle Altitude
Legend
Sec 7
Symbols
Page Name
Press View to See the
360 and ARC Selections
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-1 Terrain Page with Aviation Data Displayed and 360° View
4-6
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Terrain Overlay
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Terrain Legend
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain Data Icon
MAP Overlay Soft Keys
4.2.3.2
Terrain Proximity Page Display on a Navigation Map Page
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group.
NOTE: Terrain Proximity and NEXRAD are mutually exclusive on the map
page.
Sec 8
Glossary
4.2.3.3
Terrain Proximity Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings
1. Press the VIEW soft key to show the 360 and ARC soft keys.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-7
Index
2. Press the 360 or Arc soft key.
OR
Press MENU and with the View Arc or View 360° selection highlighted press
ENT.
Appendix A
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360/Arc soft keys or from the Page Menu.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Press the TERRAIN soft key to overlay terrain on the Navigation Map.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. On Navigation Map page 1 or 2, press the MAP soft key to show the TERRAIN
soft key.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-2 Terrain on Navigation Map Page
Foreword
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Figure 4-3 Terrain Page Menu Viewing Selections
Figure 4-5 Terrain Page with 120° Arc
4.2.3.4
Terrain Proximity Page Aviation Data
The Page Menu selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on
the Terrain page.
1. While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group, press MENU for Map
selections to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-4 Terrain Page with 360° Rings
Figure 4-6 Show/Hide Aviation Data on the Terrain Page
2. Press ENT to save the highlighted value.
4-8
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-7 Terrain Page with Aviation Data Displayed and 120° Arc View
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-8 Navigation Map Page with Terrain Data Displayed
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-9
Terrain Proximity Symbols
Terrain Proximity uses colors and symbols to depict terrain, obstacles, and
potential impact points. Amber (caution) and red (warning) indicate terrain and
obstacle alerts relative to aircraft altitude. These colors adjust automatically as
the aircraft altitude changes.
Terrain/Obstacle Altitude Legend
The Terrain/Obstacle legend is displayed at the bottom right corner of the
Navigation Map. This option is available in the Map page group.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.2.4
Figure 4-9 Terrain/Obstacle Altitude Legend
Color
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Red
Yellow
Black
Description
Terrain is at or within 100 ft below the current aircraft altitude
Terrain is between 100 ft and 1,000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Terrain is more than 1,000 ft below the current aircraft altitude
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 4-2 Terrain Altitude Color Descriptions
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Unlighted Obstacle
Threat Location
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude (Red)
Sec 8
Glossary
1000 ft
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Appendix A
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Index
Figure 4-10 Terrain Altitude Colors
4-10
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Obstacle Icons
Sec 3
MFD
Icon
Sec 2
PFD
To view obstacles individually, increase the current zoom scale.
Sec 1
System
With the exception of power lines, any number of obstacles within close
proximity of each other may display as a group on the Navigation Map. The
MFD groups obstacles when they would otherwise overlap at the current zoom
scale. When a group is drawn, only the most immediate threat is depicted. An
asterisk at the upper left of an obstacle indicates that it is a group. The relative
altitude of the highest obstacle in the group determines the asterisk’s color.
Foreword
NOTE: If an obstacle or terrain cell and the projected flight path of the
aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest threat
location on the TAWS page.
Description
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Unlighted Obstacle (height is less than 1,000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle (height is less than 1,000 ft AGL)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Unlighted Obstacle (height is greater than 1,000 ft AGL)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Lighted Obstacle (height is greater than 1,000 ft AGL)
Windmill
Sec 7
Symbols
Windmill in Group
Power Line
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 4-3 Obstacle Icon Types
Color
Yellow
Obstacle is at or within 100 ft below current aircraft altitude
Obstacle is between 100 ft and 1,000 ft below current aircraft
altitude
Obstacle is between 1,000 ft and 2,000 ft below current aircraft
altitude
Index
White
Appendix A
Red
Description
Table 4-4 Obstacle Altitude Color Descriptions
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-11
Foreword
Sec 2
PFD
TAWS (Terrain Awareness and Warning System) is an optional feature to
increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain
(CFIT). TAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and
obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft.
TAWS satisfies TSO-C151c Class B requirements for certification. Class B
TAWS is required for all Part 91 turbine aircraft operations with six or more
passenger seats and for Part 135 turbine aircraft operations with six to nine
passenger seats (FAR Parts 91.223, 135.154).
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 1
System
4.3 Terrain Awareness and Warning System
(Optional)
4.3.1
TAWS-B Requirements
• A valid terrain/obstacle
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
4.3.2
TAWS-B Limitations
WARNING: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from
government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the
data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
TAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft.
Refer to AFM for TAWS alert procedures.
TAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources.
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that
may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in
the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of
the content, per TSO-C151c.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TAWS requires the following to operate properly:
4-12
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.3.3
TAWS Self-Test
Sec 1
System
• “TAWS System Test OK”
Foreword
During G500/G600 power-up, the terrain/obstacle database versions display
with a disclaimer. A TAWS self-test runs simultaneously. One of the following
aural messages is generated:
• “TAWS System Failure”
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS are referenced to Mean
Sea Level. Using the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude, TAWS displays a 2-D
(or 3-D with SVT) picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to
the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and
GPS-MSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path
in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS can
provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal
position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements.
GPS altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL
altitude) and is used to determine TAWS alerts. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is
affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GPSMSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude
source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
Sec 3
MFD
Computing GPS Altitude for TAWS
Sec 2
PFD
TAWS information can be displayed on the MFD in the TAWS page of the
MAP page group. Terrain and obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet
Above Ground Level (AGL) are contained in the database.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-13
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid
heading. If orientation is not heading up, it will be track up. Two views are
available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the
radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range is adjustable with the RNG keys from
1 to 200 NM, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying TAWS Information
1) In MAP page group, turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS Page.
2) Press the RNG keys to display a larger or smaller area.
Map Orientation
North Indication
Range Rings
Altitude
Information
Yellow Terrain (Caution
- Terrain Between 100 ft
and 1,000 ft Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain (Warning
- Terrain Above or
Within 100 ft Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range
Ownship Symbol
at Present Position
Black Terrain (No Danger
- Terrain More than 1000
ft Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Page Name
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
TAWS Page
TAWS information is displayed on the last page of the Map page group. The
TAWS Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and Threat Area Indication
data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the
basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed
for reference. The display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point
of impact on the TAWS Page.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.3.4
Terrain and
Obstacle Altitude
Legend
Index
120°
360°
Arc
Range Ring
Selection Selection
Figure 4-11 360˚ View on the TAWS Page
4-14
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Changing the TAWS Page View Between 360 and Arc
1. In MAP page group, turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS page.
2. Turn the large or small MFD knob to highlight “View Arc” or “View 360°” and
then press ENT.
Sec 1
System
2. Press VIEW and then the 360 or ARC soft key to select the desired view.
OR
1. While viewing the TAWS page, press the MENU key.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-12 Select TAWS Display View (360 or Arc)
2. Press the MENU key. Turn the large or small MFD knob to highlight “Show
Aviation Data” or “Hide Aviation Data” and then press ENT.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Showing/Hiding Aviation Information on the TAWS Page
1. In MAP page group, turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS page.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-13 Show/Hide Aviation Data
2. Press the MENU key and then turn the large or small MFD knob to highlight
“Test TAWS.”
Appendix A
Manually Testing the TAWS System
1. Select the TAWS page.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-15
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Figure 4-14 TAWS Page Menu
Sec 2
PFD
3. Press the ENT key to confirm the selection.
One of the following aural messages is generated:
• “TAWS System Failure”
TAWS TEST is annunciated in yellow on the TAWS page and in white on the
PFD.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
• “TAWS System Test OK”
Index
Figure 4-15 TAWS Test Display and PFD Annunciation
4-16
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.3.5
TAWS Alerts
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD (TAWS
map page only). The TAWS Alert Annunciation is shown to the upper left of
the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the
TAWS page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD on
the page being viewed.
Foreword
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within
TAWS software algorithms. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are
displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. TAWS alert types are shown
in the TAWS Alerts Summary (Table 4-6) with corresponding annunciations and
aural messages.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
TAWS Alert
Pop-Up
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-16 TAWS Alert Pop Up
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Appendix A
• Press the CLR key (returns to the currently viewed page)
OR
• Press the ENT key (accesses the TAWS Page)
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-17
Index
If the pilot takes no action, the pop-up will be removed when the alert is no
longer active.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
4.3.5.1
TAWS-B Alerting Colors and Symbology
Color and symbols are also associated with TAWS alerts. The three TAWS
alert levels and their associated text coloring as well as any associated symbology
are shown in the following table.
Alert Level
Annunciator Text
Warning
White text on red
background
Caution
Black text on yellow
background
Threat Area
Indication Symbol
Example Visual Annunciation
Table 4-5 TAWS Alert Colors and Symbology
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-17 TAWS Alert Annunciations (Pull Up)
4-18
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
“Pull Up”
FLTA Obstacle Warning
(ROC-W, IOI-W)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
None
Sec 5
Additional
Features
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
Sec 7
Symbols
“Don’t Sink”*
“Too Low, Terrain”
Table 4-6 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
Appendix A
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for
the default configuration are indicated with asterisks.
Sec 8
Glossary
Premature Descent
Alert Caution (PDA)
Voice Callout
(VCO-500)
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR-C)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR-C)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
FLTA Terrain Caution
(RTC-C, ITI-C)
FLTA Obstacle Caution
(ROC-C, IOI-C)
FLTA Wire Caution
(ILI-C, RLC-C)
Sec 3
MFD
FLTA Wire Warning
(ILI-W, RLC-W)
Sec 2
PFD
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead,
Pull Up”*
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up”*
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Wire Ahead, Pull Up; Wire Ahead, Pull Up”*
"Wire, Wire, Pull Up, Pull Up"
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
“Wire Ahead; Wire Ahead”*
“Caution, Wire; Caution; Wire”
“Too Low, Terrain”
Sec 1
System
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR-W)
FLTA Terrain Warning
(RTC-W, ITI-W)
Aural Message
Foreword
Alert Type
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-19
Excessive Descent Rate Alert
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide
notification when the aircraft is determined to be descending upon terrain at an
excessive rate. The parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151c are shown
below.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.3.5.2
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-18 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
4-20
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.3.5.3
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
En Route
Terminal
Approach
Departure
Minimum Clearance Altitude (feet)
Level Flight
Descending
700
500
350
300
150
100
100
100
Sec 2
PFD
Flight Phase
Sec 1
System
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts
are issued when the aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in
the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are accompanied by a potential
impact point displayed on the TAWS Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance
altitudes in the following table.
Foreword
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance (ROC) alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain,
yet is projected to come within the minimum clearance values in the FLTA Alert
Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values table. When an RTC alert and/
or a ROC is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the TAWS Page.
Sec 7
Symbols
During final approach, FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the
aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 NM of the approach runway or
below 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the runway threshold.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Table 4-7 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-21
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 NM of the destination
airport and ends when the aircraft is either 0.5 NM from the runway threshold
or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the threshold. During
the final descent, algorithms set a threshold for alerting based on speed, distance,
and other parameters.
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
700
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
600
500
400
300
100
Runway 1
Threshold
Sec 5
Additional
Features
PDA Alerting Area
200
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance From Destination Airport (nm)
Figure 4-19 PDA Alerting Threshold
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion
should be used when inhibiting TAWS and the system should be enabled when
appropriate. When TAWS is inhibited, the alert annunciation “TAWS INHB” is
shown on the PFD and MFD (Figure 4-16).
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Premature Descent Alerting
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the
aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.3.5.4
4-22
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.3.5.5
Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS Alerting
Sec 1
System
NOTE: See AFMS for guidance on inhibiting TAWS.
Foreword
TAWS also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the PDA/FLTA aural and
visual alerts. Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS and always
remember to enable the system when appropriate. Only the PDA and FLTA
alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-20 TAWS Alerting Disabled (TAWS Inhibited) Annunciation (PFD & MFD)
2. Press the INHIBIT soft key to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice dependent on
current state).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
OR
1. Press the MENU key.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. Use the large or small MFD knob to highlight “Inhibit TAWS” or “Enable
TAWS” (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT key.
4.3.5.6
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
1. In MAP page group, turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS Page.
Five-Hundred Aural Alert
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
NOTE: The five-hundred aural callout provided by TAWS-B is not in relation
to the optional radar altimeter, if installed.
Sec 7
Symbols
The purpose of the aural alert message “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory
alert that the aircraft is 500 feet above terrain. When the aircraft descends within
500 feet of terrain, the aural message “Five-hundred” is generated. There are no
display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the aural message.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-23
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.3.5.7
Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Take-Off alert (also referred to as
“Altitude Loss After Take-Off”) provides alerts when the system determines the
aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff. The aural message
“Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a
pop-up terrain alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing
from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 NM or less
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
The NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151c are shown below.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110º
1000
800
600
400
“DON’T SINK”
200
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Altitude Loss (Feet)
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
“DON’T SINK”
300
200
100
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Appendix A
Sink Rate (Feet Per Minute)
Index
Figure 4-21 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Alert Criteria
4-24
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.3.5.8
TAWS Not Available Alert
TAWS System Status
Aural Message
None
“TAWS Available”
None
TAWS System Test in Progress
TAWS System Test Pass
Sec 7
Symbols
TAWS Available
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Alert Type
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
Sec 8
Glossary
TAWS N/A
TAWS Not Available
None
TAWS Alerting is Disabled
TAWS System Test Fail
Sec 5
Additional
Features
During power-up, TAWS conducts a self-test of its aural and visual
annunciations. The system test can also be manually initiated. An aural alert is
issued at test completion. TAWS System Testing is disabled when ground speed
exceeds 30 knots.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4.3.6
Sec 3
MFD
TAWS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database
validity, hardware status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not
available, the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is generated along with a
‘TAWS FAIL’ annunciation.
Sec 2
PFD
TAWS Failure Alert
Sec 1
System
4.3.5.9
Foreword
TAWS requires a 3-D GPS position solution along with specific vertical
accuracy minimums. Should the position solution become degraded or if the
aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation “TAWS N/A” is
generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS page. The aural message
“TAWS Not Available” is generated. When the GPS signal is re-established and
the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural message “TAWS
Available” is generated.
Appendix A
“TAWS System Failure”
Table 4-8 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-25
External TAWS
If a GNS 500WT-series with TAWS or a GTN-series with TAWS or Terrain
Alerting is interfaced as GPS 1, text alerts generated by the GNS/GTN will be
displayed on the PFD. Other visual alert depictions may appear on the PFD and/
or MFD as well, depending on the configuration. See Section 4.1 for additional
information. Refer to the GNS 500WT-series or GTN-series Pilot’s Guides and/
or Addendums for more information regarding these TAWS alerts. Text alerts
received from the GNS/GTN TAWS unit will be displayed to the left and aligned
with the top of the Altitude Tape on the PFD. A new annunciation will flash for
approximately five seconds.
• TAWS annunciations can only be received from the #1 GPS unit.
• If the Garmin GPS/TAWS is not available and Terrain-SVT is enabled, the
G500/G600 Terrain-SVT will generate PFD text alerts and aural callouts.
An advisory message will indicate when reversion to Terrain-SVT alerting
has occurred.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.4
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Depending on configuration, some installations with a GTN-series unit
generate terrain impact points on the MFD from crossfilled GTN data.
Terrain
PFD/MFD Visual
MFD Pop-up
Configurations
Annunciations
Alert
None
GTN w/ External When configured for External
TAWS (HSDB), the GDU will not
TAWS Unit
Installed (HSDB) generate any alerts; all alerts are
crossfilled from the GTN.
None
PFD annunciations are
G500/G600
Terrain Proximity generated from the External
TAWS Unit.
w/ External
TAWS Unit
No MFD Annunciations.
Installed
(500W-series)
Aural
Alerting
None
None
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-22 TAWS Annunciations from a GNS/GTN TAWS
4-26
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Aural
Alerting
G500/
G600 aural
alerts are
suppressed.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Not
suppressed.
Sec 3
MFD
G500/G600 w/
TAWS-B
PFD/MFD Visual
MFD Pop-up
Annunciations
Alert
None
PFD annunciations are
generated from the External
TAWS Unit.
No MFD Annunciations are
generated from the G500/G600.
Terrain impact shading on the
PFD SVT is generated through
the internal Terrain-SVT alerting.
Annunciations generated from Generated
the G500/G600.
from the
G500/G600.
Foreword
Terrain
Configurations
G500/G600 w/
Terrain-SVT and
External TAWS
Unit Installed
(500W-series)
Table 4-9 G500/G600 TAWS Annunciations
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4.5
Terrain-SVT
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVT information for primary terrain
avoidance. Terrain-SVT is intended only to enhance situational
awareness.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-27
Index
Garmin Terrain-SVT is required for those SVT installations that do not have
TAWS-A or TAWS-B enabled.
Appendix A
Garmin Terrain-SVT is available in G500/G600 GDU 620 SW version 3.00,
and later.
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin Terrain-SVT alerting consists of the following alert types:
• Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Alerting which consists of:
• Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) / Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
Alerting
• Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) / Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) Alerting
Sec 7
Symbols
Garmin Terrain-SVT refers to a subset of Class B TAWS that meets the terrain
alerting requirements outlined in Section 7.b of AC 23-26. Terrain-SVT is a
subset of Class B TAWS that provides a Class B TAWS FLTA functionality with
visual alerting and aural alerting. Terrain-SVT is provided with Synthetic Vision
Technology (SVT) functionality and not marketed separately.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: Terrain-SVT is standard when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
option is installed. The TAWS option will take precendence over Terrain-SVT.
Terrain-SVT Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360/Arc soft keys or from the Page Menu.
Figure 4-23 Terrain-SVT 360 and Arc Views
1. Press VIEW and then the 360 or Arc soft key.
OR
2. Press MENU and the with the "View Arc" or "View 360°" selection highlighted
press ENT.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.5.1
Index
Appendix A
Figure 4-24 Terrain-SVT Page Menu Viewing Selections
4-28
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.5.2
Terrain-SVT Page Aviation Data
Select the display of Aviation data on the Terrain-SVT page. The Page Menu
selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain or the
Map Setup options for the Navigation Map pages.
Foreword
1. While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group, press MENU for Map
selections to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain or the Map
Setup options for the Navigation Map pages.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-25 Show/Hide Aviation Data on the Terrain-SVT Page
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Press ENT to save the highlighted value.
Inhibiting/Enabling Terrain-SVT Alerting
Terrain-SVT has an inhibit mode that deactivates the FLTA aural and visual
alerts. Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting Terrain-SVT and always
remember to enable the system when appropriate.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.5.3
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-29
Index
2. Use the large or small MFD knob to highlight “Inhibit Terrain” or “Enable
Terrain” (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT key.
Appendix A
2. Press the INHIBIT soft key to inhibit or enable Terrain SVT (choice dependent
on current state).
OR
1. Press the MENU key.
Sec 8
Glossary
1. In MAP page group, turn the small MFD knob to reach the Terrain SVT Page.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-26 Terrain-SVT Alerting Disabled (Alerts Inhibited) Annunciation (PFD & MFD)
Terrain-SVT alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity
level, or both. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and
aural alerts are simultaneously issued.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD (TerrainSVT page only). The TAWS/Terrain Alert Annunciation is shown to the upper
left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If
the Terrain-SVT page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the
MFD.
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
Synthetic Vision Alerts and Annunciations
Sec 1
System
4.5.4
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Press the CLR key (returns to the currently viewed page)
OR
Press the ENT key (accesses the Terrain-SVT Page)
Index
Figure 4-27 Terrain-SVT Advisory Pop-Up on the MFD
4-30
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Alert Type
Aural Message
Foreword
“Terrain System Available”
“Terrain System test OK”
None
Sec 1
System
GPS signal re-established
Terrain System Test Successful
Terrain System Test in Progress
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
None
None
None
Terrain Alerting is disabled
“Terrain System Not Available”
Sec 2
PFD
“Terrain System Failure”
Sec 3
MFD
No GPS position
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
Terrain SVT System Test Fail
Table 4-10 Terrain-SVT System Test Status Annunciations
Aural Message
Sec 5
Additional
Features
“Caution, Terrain, Terrain”
“Caution, Wire, Wire”
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
“Warning, Terrain, Terrain”
“Warning, Wire, Wire”
Sec 7
Symbols
“Caution, Obstacle, Obstacle”
Sec 8
Glossary
FLTA Terrain Caution
(RTC-C, ITI-C)
FLTA Terrain Caution
(RLC-C, ILI-C)
FLTA Terrain Warning
(RTC-W, ITI-W)
FLTA Terrain Warning
(RLC-W, ILI-W)
FLTA Obstacle Caution
(ROC-C, IOI-C)
FLTA Obstacle Warning
(ROC-W, IOI-W)
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Alert Type
“Warning, Obstacle, Obstacle”
Appendix A
Table 4-11 Terrain-SVT Alerts Summary
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-31
Traffic Systems
The Traffic function requires the installation of a compatible traffic device
and will then provide a separate traffic page in the Map page group as well as the
overlay of traffic on the Map Navigation pages. TIS and TAS cannot be displayed
at the same time. If the aircraft has a TAS unit installed, the GDU 620 will be
configured for TAS. If no TAS unit is installed and a GTX Mode-S transponder
is installed then the GDU 620 will be configured for TIS. A pilot can tell which
data is being displayed by the label in the top left corner (TAS/TCAS: OPER
for TAS/TCAS data and TIS: OPER for TIS data). TIS data comes from a GTX
transponder. Coverage is limited to specific areas as shown in the Aeronautical
Information Manual (AIM). TAS data comes from a TAS unit such as a Garmin
GTS 800 or 820, Skywatch 497, KTA 810, or other unit. Coverage follows the
aircraft. In the Navigation Map page setup you can select the maximum range at
which traffic symbols are shown. Once outside of the selected range, traffic will
be decluttered. The Traffic soft key will still be available. The Garmin GDL 88
can provide TIS-B and ADS-B information. The Garmin GTS ADS-B products
can also provide ADS-B information.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6
4-32
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.6.1 TRAFFIC POP-UP
Sec 1
System
NOTE: The traffic pop-up will not appear when your aircraft is on the
ground.
Foreword
When the GDU 620 MFD is displaying any page (other than the Traffic page)
and a traffic alert becomes active, the Traffic pop-up will be displayed.
Press ENT to go directly to the Traffic page.
Sec 2
PFD
OR
Press CLR to return to the previously viewed page.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Traffic Pop-Up
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-28 Traffic Pop-Up
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-33
TAS/TCAS 1 Traffic (Optional)
TAS refers to an active Traffic Advisory System that may be optionally
displayed on the PFD and/or MFD. The TAS is installed separately from the
G500/G600 system. There are variations in performance and control among
the various G500/G600-compatible TAS systems. Refer to the appropriate TAS
documentation for detailed information on the operation of the TAS system.
This section describes the display and control functions available on the
G500/G600 system.
NOTE: TIS and TAS are mutually exclusive.
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both
Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting
capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.2
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: Traffic is also displayed in the SVT feature on the PFD.
4-34
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.6.2.1
Displaying and Operating Traffic (TAS/TCAS Systems)
Sec 1
System
Operating Mode
Foreword
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS/TCAS traffic data in relation
to the aircraft’s current position and altitude. Traffic page orientation is always
heading up. The traffic mode and altitude filter mode are annunciated in the
upper left corner.
Sec 2
PFD
Range Ring
Proximity
Advisory, Aircraft
is 500 ft Above
and Descending
Sec 3
MFD
Traffic Advisory,
200 ft Above and
Descending
Ownship Symbol
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Non-Threat Traffic,
2000 ft Below and
Climbing
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Non-Threat
Traffic,
2000 ft Above
and Climbing
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Non-Bearing Traffic (System is Unable to Determine Bearing), Aircraft
Distance is 2.0 NM, 1100 ft Above and Descending
Figure 4-29 Traffic Map Page - TAS/TCAS
Sec 7
Symbols
4.6.2.2
Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Modes
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed.
NOTE: Not all TAS systems can be controlled from the G500/G600. The
Operate/Standby soft keys may not be displayed. An alert will be generated
when Standby is selected and the aircraft is in the air.
Appendix A
2. To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY soft key.
Sec 8
Glossary
1. While viewing the Traffic Page of the MAP page group, select the OPERATE soft
key to select Operating Mode.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-35
Foreword
4.6.2.3
Pressing the RNG keys will zoom in and out in preset steps depending on
the installed equipment.
Sec 1
System
4.6.2.4
Altitude Display
Changing the altitude display mode
1. Press the ALT MODE soft key to change the altitude filter.
2. Select the desired altitude filter by pressing the BELOW, NORMAL,
ABOVE, or UNRSTD (unrestricted) soft keys. The selection is displayed in the
Altitude mode field.
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Range Ring
Displayed Traffic Range (ft)
-9,900 to 2,700
-2,700 to 2,700
-2,700 to 9,900
All Traffic Shown (-9,900 to 9,900)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 4-12 Displayed Traffic Range
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: Traffic Advisories (TAs) are always displayed, regardless of altitude
mode.
4-36
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.6.2.5
TAS/TCAS Symbology
TAS Symbol
Foreword
Traffic is displayed using four different symbols.
Description
Sec 1
System
Other Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Sec 2
PFD
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Sec 3
MFD
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 4-13 TAS/TCAS Traffic Symbol Description
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding
aircraft. Closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria for the
specific traffic system. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display
range is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative
bearing of the intruder.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The traffic system determines the type of symbol used for each target. Refer
to the traffic system documentation for information regarding the criteria used
to determine target type.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-37
Traffic System Status
NOTE: Refer to the equipment documentation for information on the
self-test and operating modes.
The traffic mode is indicated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
Page.
Mode
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.2.6
Sec 3
MFD
TAS Self-test Initiated
TAS Standby
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
OPERATING
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Table 4-14 TAS Modes
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the
center of the Traffic Map Page.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TAS Operating
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Sec 7
Symbols
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
TRFC FAIL
Sec 8
Glossary
NO TRFC DATA
DATA FAILED
Appendix A
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit.
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data).
Data is not being received from the TAS unit.
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is
self-reporting a failure.
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit.
Index
Table 4-15 TAS Failure Annunciations
4-38
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
For TAS traffic, TEST MODE can be initiated from the Page Menu (press the
MENU key) when the traffic device is in Standby mode.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 4-16 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page.
**Shown centered on the bottom of Traffic Map Page.
Sec 3
MFD
TA/ X.XNM/± XX ↕**
Sec 2
PFD
TA X.X ± XX ↕**
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory.
Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending).
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory.
Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending). The system distance units are set
to Metric or Imperial and are shown as such in all other
cases except for the traffic distance annunciation.
Sec 1
System
TA OFF SCALE*
Description
Foreword
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a
banner at the lower left corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-39
Foreword
4.6.3
TIS Traffic (Optional)
Sec 1
System
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory
use only. TIS is intended to help the pilot locate traffic visually. It is the
responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
Sec 2
PFD
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of
a TIS-capable terminal radar site. Aircraft without an operating transponder
are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS. Aircraft without
altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data
or climb descent indication.
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: TIS and TAS are mutually exclusive.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Traffic is also displayed in the SVT feature of the PFD.
The type of traffic systems that is installed is determined by the traffic page
display in the upper left corner of the MFD.
If Traffic Information Service (TIS) is configured, TIS will be displayed in the
upper left corner of the MFD.
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and
avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic data
link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated every
five seconds. The GDU 620 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5 NM
radius, from 3,000 feet below to 3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic
is displayed according to TCAS symbology using three different symbols.
4.6.3.1
Traffic Map Page
The Traffic Map Page is configured to show surrounding TIS traffic data in
relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude, without clutter from the
basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is
no valid heading.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
Page. When the aircraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby
Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to Operating
Mode and the GDU 620 begins to display traffic information.
4-40
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page
1. Turn the large MFD knob to select the Map Page Group.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
Sec 1
System
3. Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
Select the OPERATE soft key to begin displaying traffic.
OR
Sec 2
PFD
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Select Operate Mode (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and then press the ENT
key.
Sec 3
MFD
Operating
Mode
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Traffic Advisory,
Aircraft is 1200 feet
above, climbing,
and moving in the
direction of the line
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Other Traffic,
Aircraft is 3000 feet
above, climbing and
moving in the direction
of the line
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-30 Traffic Map Page - TIS
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-41
Foreword
4.6.3.2
TIS Symbology
TIS Symbol
Description
Sec 1
System
Non-Threat Traffic
Sec 2
PFD
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 4-17 TIS Traffic Symbols
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding
aircraft. Closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic
Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated by a half TA
symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic
is moving, to the nearest 45º. Traffic information for which TIS is unable to
determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the bottom center of
the Traffic Map Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of other map pages
on which traffic can be displayed.
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder
aircraft is displayed above/below the traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the
other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation appears
above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude
trend is displayed as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in
either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic symbols for aircraft
without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or
climb/descent information.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Traffic Advisory (TA)
4-42
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.6.3.3
TIS Limitations
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar, which is a “secondary
surveillance” radar similar to the ATCRBS. TIS operation may be intermittent
during turns or other maneuvering. TIS is dependent on two-way, “line-ofsight” communication between the aircraft and the Mode S radar. Whenever the
structure of the client aircraft comes between the transponder antenna (usually
located on the underside of the aircraft) and the ground-based radar antenna,
the signal may be temporarily interrupted. Other limitations and anomalies
associated with TIS are described in the AIM.
Sec 2
PFD
While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance, it has some system
limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use. Many of these
limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. In other words, the
information provided by TIS will be no better than that provided to ATC. TIS
will only display aircraft with operating transponders installed.
Sec 1
System
TIS is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not
relieve the pilot of responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS should not
be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no
visual contact with the intruder aircraft. TIS is intended only to assist in visual
acquisition of other aircraft in VMC. No recommended avoidance maneuvers
are provided, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS
advisory.
Foreword
NOTE: This section on TIS Limitations is not comprehensive. Garmin
recommends the user review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical
Information Manual.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-43
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Garmin is not responsible for Mode S
geographical coverage. Operation of the
ground stations is the responsibility of the
FAA. Refer to the Aeronautical Information
Manual for a Terminal Mode S Radar Site Map
covering the U.S.
TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which
the uplink occurs. Therefore, the surveillance information is approximately
five seconds old. In order to present the intruders in a “real time” position,
the TIS ground station uses a “predictive algorithm” in its tracking software.
This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their expected
positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit. Occasionally, aircraft
maneuvering will cause this algorithm to induce errors in the display. These
errors primarily affect relative bearing information and traffic target track vector
(it will lag); intruder distance and altitude will remain relatively accurate and
may be used to assist in “see and avoid.” Some of the more common examples
of these errors follow:
Appendix A
• When client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the
tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the
maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client aircraft
course at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head on) and either aircraft
abruptly changes course within 0.25 NM, TIS may display the intruder on
the opposite side of the client than it actually is.
Index
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: TIS will be unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U.S.,
particularly in mountainous regions. Also, when flying near the “floor” of
radar coverage in a particular area, intruders below the client aircraft may
not be detected by TIS.
These are relatively rare occurrences and will be corrected in a few
radar scans once the course has stabilized.
4-44
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.6.3.4
TIS Alerts
Foreword
When the number of Traffic Advisories (TAs) on the Traffic Map Page
increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
Sec 1
System
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft,
the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only when the number of TAs
increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual
annunciation are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display,
no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second TA appears on the
display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently
increases, another voice alert is generated.
Sec 2
PFD
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service.
Appendix A
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
Sec 8
Glossary
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the
coverage extends from about 3,000 feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and
obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
Sec 7
Symbols
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and
out of range of an adjacent site.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIScapable Mode S radar site.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Traffic may not be displayed in the radar coverage area due to the following:
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
A “Traffic Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service
becomes unavailable or is out of range.
Sec 3
MFD
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator
on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and remaining displayed until no TAs are
detected in the area.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-45
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
4.6.3.5
TIS System Status
The GDU 620 performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If
TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby Mode on the ground or Operating
Mode in the air. If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA*
FAILED*
TIS is unavailable or out of range
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action.
Table 4-18 TIS Failure Annunciations
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
Page. When the aircraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby
Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby Mode is
selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case when TIS
has failed). Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and
traffic information is displayed. The mode can be changed manually using soft
keys or the page menu.
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
TIS Standby
STANDBY
(Also shown in white in center of
page)
TIS Failed*
FAIL
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Data is not being received from the transponder
Data is being received from the transponder, but a failure is
detected in the data stream
The transponder has failed
UNAVAILABLE
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
DATA FAILED*
Description
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
Table 4-19 TIS Modes
4-46
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
OR
2. Select Operate mode or Standby mode whether airborne or on the ground.
Sec 2
PFD
1. Press the MENU key.
Sec 1
System
2. Select the STANDBY or OPERATE soft key to switch between modes. The mode
is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Foreword
Switching Between TIS Operating Modes
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group and then turn the small MFD
knob to the Traffic Map Page.
3. Press the ENT key.
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: An alert will be generated when Standby is selected and the
aircraft is in the air.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The annunciations indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner
at the lower left corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-47
TA OFF SCALE*
TA X.X ± XX↕**
TA/ X.XNM/± XX↕
**
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Traffic Status
Banner
Annunciation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
AGE MM:SS
Sec 7
Symbols
TRFC COAST
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
TRFC RMVD
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory.
Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory.
Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending). The system distance units are set to Metric or
Imperial and are shown as such in all other cases except for
the traffic distance annunciation.
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds.
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is
removed from the display.
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the
age increases.
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last
message).
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when
this message is displayed.
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to
60 seconds since last message).
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is
not displayed.
Traffic data has failed.
Traffic has not been detected.
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range.
* Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page.
** Shown centered on the bottom of Traffic Map Page.
Table 4-20 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
4-48
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.6.4
ADS-B Traffic (Optional)
OPR/STBY
Motion
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Back
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
30 Sec
1 Min
2 Min
5 Min
Back
Deselect
Sec 1
System
Absolute
Relative
Off
Duration
Alt Mode
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Back
Figure 4-31 ADS-B Traffic Page Functional Diagram
2. Turn the small or large MFD knobs clockwise or counter-clockwise to step
through selection of the available targets.
Sec 7
Symbols
Traffic targets displayed on the dedicated traffic page may be selected in order
to obtain additional information about a traffic target.
1. Press the small MFD knob to start target selection.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Target Selection
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Availability of the OPR/STBY soft key depends on the installation. When
in Standby mode, press the MENU key to display the Page menu to place the
traffic LRU into Test mode.
4.6.4.1
Foreword
ADS-B In allows a properly-equipped aircraft to receive TIS-B and other
aircraft equipped with ADS-B out capability.
3. After selecting a target, you can press the small MFD knob to leave the target
selected, and return the small MFD to page selection mode.
Sec 8
Glossary
4. Use the DESELECT soft key to turn off selected traffic.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-49
Sec 2
PFD
Selected
Traffic Info
Range Ring
Radius
Sec 1
System
Foreword
ADS-B and
TCAS Status and
Altitude Filter
Map
Orientation
Traffic Motion
Vector
Basic Directional
Traffic, 4000 ft
Below and
Climbing
Ownship
Icon
Turn Cursor
Knob for
Next Target
Selected Vector
Motion and
Duration
Figure 4-32 ADS-B Traffic Page (Absolute Motion)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Range Rings
NOTE: Traffic targets within 1200 ft vertical separation and 6NM from
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
the ownship are depicted as proximate targets.
4-50
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Symbol
Foreword
Description
Basic Non-Directional Traffic
Basic Directional Traffic
Sec 1
System
Basic Off-scale Selected Traffic
Proximate Non-Directional Traffic
Sec 2
PFD
Proximate Directional Traffic
Sec 3
MFD
Proximate Off-scale Selected Traffic
Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Off-Scale Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Non-Directional Surface Vehicle
Directional Surface Vehicle
NOTE: Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on airborne/on-ground
Sec 8
Glossary
status of target (target is brown when on the ground, see the surface vehicles).
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 4-21 ADS-B Traffic Symbols
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-51
Status
ADS-B Status
ADS-B Status displays the current status of traffic application: Off, Surface,
Airborne, N/A, Fail, or Test.
TCAS Status
If a TCAS system is integrated with the ADS-B system then this shows the
current status of the TCAS system. When the ADS-B system is integrated with
a TCAS system, the controls are provided on the installed navigator and the
OPR/STBY soft key is not available.
The ADS-B traffic map page orients heading up. If heading is not valid, the
display reverts to track up. If heading and track are invalid, the display latches
to the last known orientation.
Altitude Filter
The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below, Normal, Above or
Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the “Displayed Traffic Range” table. The
filter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. Press the Alt Mode smart key to
display the altitude smart keys. Press the smart key to select the altitude filter
value.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.6.4.2
Sec 7
Symbols
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Displayed Traffic Range (ft)
-9,900 to 2,700
-2,700 to 2,700
-2,700 to 9,900
All Traffic Shown (-9,900 to 9,900)
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 4-22 Displayed Traffic Range
4-52
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: Absolute motion vectors match the color of the intruder (white or
yellow). Relative motion vectors are green except for Traffic Advisories whose
Relative Motion vectors are yellow. The annunciation on the bottom of the
dedicated traffic page indicates which vector type is selected and their length.
Foreword
4.6.4.3
Motion Vector
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the
traffic targets depict the target reported track and speed over the ground. When
Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic targets
display how the traffic target is moving relative to your aircraft. These vectors are
calculated using the traffic targets track and ground speed and your aircraft’s track
and ground speed. These two values are combined to depict where the traffic target
is moving with respect to your aircraft and indicates where the traffic target will be,
relative to your aircraft, at the time specified by the length of the vector.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-53
Index
NOTE: Relative Motion vectors are unavailable when the aircraft is on
the ground. The duration will be annunciated as UNAVAIL after “RELATIVE
MOTION -” at the bottom of the screen.
Appendix A
Figure 4-33 Absolute Motion (White Vectors)
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-34 Relative Motion (Green Vectors)
Vector Duration
The Vector Duration selection sets the time that the vector will show the
calculated distance and direction of the traffic target. A longer duration will
result in a longer vector. Press the smart key for the desired duration.
SiriusXM WX Satellite Weather (Optional)
The primary map for viewing SiriusXM WX Satellite Weather data are the
Weather Data Link Pages in the Map Page Group. These are the only GDU 620
map displays capable of all available SiriusXM WX Satellite weather products.
The SiriusXM WX Satellite Weather pages may be oriented to either Track Up
or North Up.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
4.7
4-54
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.1
Using SiriusXM WX Satellite Weather Products
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
If a weather product is not received within the 30, 60, 90, or 120 minute
Expiration Time intervals, the data is considered expired and is removed from
the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is
currently being broadcast by SiriusXM WX Satellite Radio services. If more than
half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received, the
color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
Foreword
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the
Navigation Map Page, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age
of the product is based on the time difference between when the data was
assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are
refreshed at specific intervals.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-55
Customizing the SiriusXM WX Satellite
Weather Map
Each Wx Data Link Map page may be customized individually. The Wx
Data Link Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page Menu.
The Page Menu options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying the
Weather Legends. The Weather Setup choice covers selections for adjusting the
viewing ranges of the weather products.
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Figure 4-35 Weather Page Menu Options
2. Turn the Large or Small MFD knob to select Weather Setup (1/2) or Weather
Setup (2/2) and press ENT.
Figure 4-36 Weather Setup Group Selection
3. With the Data Link Setup Menu displayed, turn the Large MFD knob to
highlight the desired item and then turn the small MFD knob to select the
desired weather feature value. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected,
weather data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM)
and lower.
4. Press ENT to save a selection.
5. Turn the large MFD knob to the next desired option or press the small MFD
knob to cancel and return to the XM WX Satellite Weather Data Link Map Page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.2
4-56
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
WX Page Menu - Weather Setup
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
North Up, Track Up
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
On/Off
US, Canada
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Sec 2
PFD
Map Orientation
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
NEXRAD Legend
Source
Echo Top Data Viewing Range
Cloud Top Data Viewing Range
Lightning Data Viewing Range
Cell Mov Data Viewing Range
SIG/AIR Viewing Range
PIREPS Data Viewing Range
METAR Data Viewing Range
Surface Data Viewing Range
Frz Lvl Data Viewing Range
Wnds Aloft Data Viewing Range
County Data Viewing Range
TFR Data Viewing Range
AIREPS Data Viewing Range
Icing Data Viewing Range
Turbulence Data Viewing Range
Cyclone Data Viewing Range
Sec 1
System
Adjustment
Foreword
Menu Item
Table 4-23 Weather Page Menu Setup Options
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-57
SiriusXM WX Weather Symbols and Product
Age
The broadcast rate represents the interval at which SiriusXM WX Satellite Radio
broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new weather data. It does not
represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by
the Data Link Receiver. Weather data is updated at intervals that are defined and
controlled by SiriusXM Satellite Radio and its data vendors.
The product label in the legend will turn yellow at half the expiration time
and gray when expired. Expired products will not be shown on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.3
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: Product age for individual reports of SiriusXM AIRMETs,
SIGMETs, City Forecasts, County Warnings, Cell Movement and TFRs are
not provided by SiriusXM Weather Service.
Sec 8
Glossary
Product age indication for SiriusXM Icing Potential and Turbulence is
not included on the weather map. The valid time for these products is
displayed on the weather map in place of the generation time.
Index
Appendix A
The valid time indication for SiriusXM Freezing Level, Winds Aloft and
Canada Winds Aloft is not displayed. Instead, the generation time for
these is displayed.
4-58
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Symbol
Description
Foreword
Flood
Severe Thunderstorm
Sec 1
System
Tornado
Sunny
Sec 2
PFD
Part Sun
Sec 3
MFD
Cloudy
Rainy
T-Storm
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Snow
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Windy
Foggy
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Haze
High/Low Temp
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 4-24 Weather Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-59
SiriusXM Weather Legends
The LEGEND soft key displays a pop-up legend of the currently used
weather products. Pressing the LEGEND soft key again, the MFD knob, the
ENT, or CLR keys will remove the legend.
1. A full page legend can be selected by selecting the Weather Legend option in
the XM Weather Map Menu or pressing the LEGEND soft key on the Weather
Map Page. The legend displayed will match the selected weather products. Turn
the large or small MFD knobs to scroll through the legend, if necessary.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.4
4-60
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
4.7.5
SiriusXM NEXRAD
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection,
processing, and dissemination of NEXRAD images can be significant and may
not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays and the relative
age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never
use NEXRAD data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather. Instead,
use it in an early-warning capacity of pre-departure and en route evaluation.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of 158 highresolution Doppler radar systems that are operated by the National Weather
Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized meteorological information
for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum
range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 NM. The NEXRAD network provides
important information about severe weather for air traffic safety.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. An abbreviated legend may be displayed on the upper right side of a WX Data
Link Map page for the applicable weather products when selected in the Page
Menu options for Weather.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-37 Weather Legends
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-61
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown.
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar
sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather
severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data
Link Page. For the NEXRAD legend, select the LEGEND soft key when NEXRAD
is selected for display.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-38 XM Weather - NEXRAD
Figure 4-39 NEXRAD Weather Legend
4-62
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Reflectivity
NEXRAD Limitations
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.7.5.2
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative
to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy
reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the letter Z). The value of Z
increases as the returned signal strength increases.
Sec 3
MFD
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply
put, certain types of weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a
radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the weather hazard level. For
instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
Sec 2
PFD
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver.
Colors on the NEXRAD display directly correlate to the level of detected
reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather can be very complex.
Sec 1
System
4.7.5.1
Foreword
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or
ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops
information is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in
grayish-purple.
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 NM, each square block on the display
represents an area of four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected
by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data sampled
within the area.
Sec 7
Symbols
• NEXRAD composite reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna
elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude
storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• NEXRAD composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information
to determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics. For example, it
is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-63
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
Foreword
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
Sec 1
System
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
Sec 2
PFD
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar
scans
4.7.6
XM Weather Page Map Orientation
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages.
1. While viewing the Wx Data Link Map 1, 2, or 3 of the Wx page group, press the
MENU key. With “Weather Setup” highlighted, press ENT.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select “Weather Setup 1/2” and press ENT.
3. With the “Map Orientation” option active, turn the small MFD knob to change
the highlighted value.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: At present, NEXRAD data can age significantly by the time the
mosaic image is created. Although such situations are not believed to be
typical, in extreme latency and mosaic-creation scenarios, the actual age
of the oldest NEXRAD data in the mosaic can exceed the age indication
in the cockpit by 15-20 minutes. Even small time differences between
the age indicator and actual conditions can be important for safety of
flight, especially when considering fast-moving weather hazards, quickly
developing weather scenarios, and/or fast-moving aircraft.
Figure 4-40 Weather Page Map Orientation
Index
4. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
5. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-64
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.7
NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
4.7.8
NEXRAD Legend
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an
abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD.
The full legend is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
5. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 3
MFD
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight he NEXRAD Data Viewing Range value.
Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select “Weather Setup 1/2” and press ENT.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Foreword
The NEXRAD Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below the selected value NEXRAD weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
NEXRAD weather data will not be shown. For the value (such as 100 NM) that
is selected, NEXRAD data will be shown at the selected map ranges (such as 100
NM) and lower.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-41 NEXRAD Legend Selection
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-65
Index
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Appendix A
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the NEXRAD Legend value.
NEXRAD Source
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of using US or Canadian
Nexrad data.
Figure 4-42 NEXRAD Source Selection
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the NEXRAD Legend value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight US or Canada. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.9
4-66
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.10
XM Echo Tops
Sec 1
System
Echo Tops data shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or
clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at which precipitation is detected.
Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
Foreword
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, Echo Tops cannot display at
the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-43 XM Weather - Echo Tops
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or
ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops
information is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in
grayish-purple.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-67
The Echo Top Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value Echo Top weather products will be shown on the
selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Echo
Tops will not be shown. Where a value (such as 250 NM) is selected, Echo Top
data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (250 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Echo Top Data Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page, or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Echo Top Data Viewing Range
4-68
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.11
XM Cloud Tops
Sec 1
System
Cloud Tops data depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery.
Foreword
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Cloud Tops is
mutually exclusive with Echo Tops and NEXRAD.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-44 XM Weather - Cloud Tops
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
To display the Cloud Tops legend, select the LEGEND soft key when Cloud
Tops is selected for display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color
scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather products is mutually
exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops or NEXRAD data is not
shown.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-69
The Cloud Top Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Cloud Top weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Cloud Tops will not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected,
Cloud Top data will be shown at map ranges of that value (150 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Cloud Top Data Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Cloud Top Data Viewing Range
4-70
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.12
XM WX Satellite Lightning
Foreword
Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer
region. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-45 XM Weather - Lightning
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 7
Symbols
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Lightning Data Viewing Range
The Lightning Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value Lightning weather products will be shown on the selected MFD
Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Lightning will not be shown.
Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected, NEXRAD data will be shown at
map ranges of the selected value (100 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Lightning Data Viewing Range value.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-71
XM SIGMETs and AIRMETs
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s
METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather
considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued for
hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather to all aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust,
and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is
every 12 minutes.
Figure 4-46 XM Weather - AIRMETs (Graphic)
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
• Icing
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.13
• Turbulence
• IFR conditions
Index
• Mountain obscuration
• Surface winds
4-72
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. The Sigmet/Airmet information will be shown. Press the small MFD knob to
return to the previously viewed page.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Textual Sigmet/Airmets can be viewed by selecting the Sigmet/Airmet outline
on the Weather (WX) page.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a Sigmet/Airmet line. Press ENT.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Viewing Textual Sigmet/Airmets
Sec 3
MFD
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the SIG/AIR Viewing Range value.
Foreword
The SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value SIGMET/AIRMET products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
SIGMET/AIRMET will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is
selected, SIGMET/AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of the selected
value (100 NM) and lower.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-47 XM Weather - AIRMETs (Text)
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-73
XM PIREPs
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a
particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or
forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A
PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low inflight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued
as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Figure 4-48 XM Weather PIREPs
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the PIREPs value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.14
4-74
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.15
XM METARs
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
Foreword
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are updated hourly and are considered current. METARs typically
contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation,
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also
contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-49 XM Weather - Graphic METARs
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-75
Index
The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, METARs will
not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected, METAR data will be
shown at map ranges of the selected value (150 NM) and lower.
Appendix A
METAR Viewing Range
Foreword
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the METAR Data Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather
(WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag. Press ENT.
2. The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Viewing Textual METARs
Figure 4-50 XM Weather - Textual METARs
3. Use the small MFD knob or the large MFD knob to scroll through the available
information.
Index
4. Press the small MFD knob to return to the previously viewed page.
4-76
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.16
XM Winds Aloft
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up soft keys steps down or up in the
3,000 foot increments. In the figure below where 9,000 feet is selected, Winds
Aloft data will be shown at 9,000 feet.
Foreword
The Winds Aloft Altitude option allows you to select the altitude where at and
below that value Winds Aloft weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). Altitude can be selected in 3000 foot
increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL. “ALT UNAVBL” is displayed
when the altitude is unsupported for a specific product and will never show data
on the map.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-51 XM Weather - Winds Aloft
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-52 XM Weather - Winds Aloft Legend
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-77
The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Winds Aloft will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected,
Winds Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM)
and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range
4-78
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.17
XM Surface Analysis and City Forecast
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and
forecast weather conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36,
and 48 hours by pressing the SRFC TIME soft key or in the Page Menu Weather
Setup options.
When enabled, the Surface Analysis forecast shows frontal lines indicating weather fronts and the direction they are moving. High and Low pressure
centers are noted with a large H or L. The Forecast Time menu item will step
through the intervals manually.
Foreword
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within
the installed Aviation Database service area.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-53 XM Weather - Surface Analysis and City Forecast
Sec 8
Glossary
A Cold Front is a front where cold air replaces warm air. A blue line with
blue triangles that point in the direction of the cold air flow.
Appendix A
Figure 4-54 XM Weather - Cold Front
A Warm Front is where warm air replaces cold air. An orange line with
orange half moons that point in the direction of the warm air flow.
Index
Figure 4-55 XM Weather - Warm Front
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-79
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
A Stationary Front is a front with very little horizontal movement. The line
alternates with orange and blue sections which point in opposite directions to
symbolize little movement.
Figure 4-56 XM Weather - Stationary Front
An Occluded Front is where a cold front has overtaken and merged with a
warm front. The line alternates with the blue triangle and orange half moon symbols on the same side of the line pointing in the direction the front is moving.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-57 XM Weather - Occluded Front
Surface Data Viewing Range
The Surface Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value Surface Data weather products will be shown on
the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Surface Data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected,
Surface data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (150 NM) and
lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Surface Data Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
The Forecast Time option allows you to select the forecast time when the
Surface and City Forecast weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx
Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). Forecasts are available for intervals of current,
12, 24, 36, and 48 hours. The interval is selected by pressing the FCST TIME
soft key on the Wx Data Link Map page.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Forecast Time
4-80
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.18
XM County Warnings
Foreword
Sec 1
System
County data provides specific public awareness and protection weather
warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include
information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms, flood conditions, and
other natural disasters.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-58 XM Weather - County Warnings
Appendix A
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 7
Symbols
The County Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value County weather products will be shown on the
selected MFD Wx Data Link Map pages (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, County
Data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected, County
data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the County Data Viewing Range value.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
County Data Viewing Range
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-81
XM TFRs
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions. The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.19
TFR Detail
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Select TFR Symbol
To View Details
Figure 4-59 XM Weather - TFRs
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects whether
TFR information is shown on the Weather Map. TFR information will be shown
at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the information will
not be shown. For the value (such as 500 NM) selected, TFR information will be
shown at map ranges of that value (500 NM), and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 1/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the TFR Data Viewing Range option.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-82
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Viewing Textual TFRs
2. The TFR details will be shown.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing a XM Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a TFR symbol (yellow circle). Press ENT.
Foreword
Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather (WX)
pages.
3. Press the small MFD knob or ENT to return to the Weather page.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-60 XM Weather - Textual TFRs and Legend
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-83
XM Cell Movement
Cell Movement data shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by a ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares,
with direction of movement indicated with short, orange arrows.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.20
Figure 4-61 XM Weather - Cell Movement
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along
with NEXRAD. On the Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement data can be
selected independently.
Cell Movement Data Viewing Range
The Cell Movement Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range and below where Cell Movement weather products will appear on the
selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Cell
Movement will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is selected, Cell
Movement data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (100 NM)
and lower.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Cell Movement Data Viewing Range option.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-84
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.21
XM AIREPs
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 2
PFD
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the AIREPs Viewing Range option.
Foreword
Air Reports (AIREPs) are messages from an aircraft, typically from commercia
aircraft, to a ground station. AIREPs are similar to PIREPs.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-62 XM Weather - AIREPs
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-85
Foreword
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a AIREP.
2. Press ENT to view text information. Press ENT again to return to the previous page.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Viewing Textual AIREPs/PIREPs
Textual AIREPs/PIREPs can be viewed by selecting a AIREP on the Map or
Weather (WX) pages.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-63 XM Weather - AIREP Text Detail
4-86
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.22
XM Cyclone
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Cyclone Data Viewing Range option.
Foreword
The current location of the cyclone is shown along with its projected path
with the date and time.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Projected Path With Date
And Time
Current Position Of Cyclone
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-64 XM Weather - Cyclone
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-87
XM Freezing Level
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and
location at which the Freezing Level is found. When no data is displayed for a
given altitude, the data for that altitude has not been received, or is out of date
and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next update.
Figure 4-65 XM Weather - Freezing Levels
Freezing Level Viewing Range
The Freezing Level Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value Freezing Level weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Freezing Level Data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 100 NM) is
selected, Freezing Level data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value
(100 NM) and lower.
Appendix A
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Frz Lvl Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Index
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.23
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-88
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.7.24
XM Icing
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 1
System
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Foreword
The Icing product shows a graphic view of the current icing environment
in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The Icing product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current
conditions at the time of the analysis. Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing
conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large, super cooled
water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat
areas are depicted as black and red blocks over the Icing colors. Icing and SLD
data are shown between 1,000 feet and 30,000 feet in 3,000 foot increments.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Icing Data Viewing Range value.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
4. Press the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up keys to increase or decrease the
reporting altitude of icing in 3,000 foot increments. The selected altitude
is shown in a window above the altitude keys.
Appendix A
Figure 4-66 XM Weather - Icing and SLD
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-89
XM Turbulence
Turbulence data identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe
or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is
intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
1. While viewing Weather Setup 2/2 menu, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Turbulence Viewing Range value.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4. Press the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up keys to increase or decrease the
reporting altitude of icing in 3,000 foot increments. The selected altitude
is shown in a window above the altitude keys.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.7.25
4-90
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.8
Weather Radar
Garmin Weather Radar Description
• Range
• On/Off controls
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The GWX 68 synchronizes the following radar functions across all connected
displays.
• Mode
• Tilt
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Synchronized Radar - GWX 68 Only
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Refer to the documentation of each radar for specific features.
Sec 3
MFD
To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers pilotadjustable horizontal scan angles of 20º, 40º, 60º, or 90º (up to 120º with the
GWX 70). A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients,
and cell buildup activity at various altitudes.
Sec 2
PFD
The Garmin GWX 68 and GWX 70 Airborne Color Weather Radars combine
excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with a high-definition target
display.
4.8.1.1
Sec 1
System
4.8.1
Foreword
The G500/G600 can display weather radar from a Garmin GWX system or
from selected 3rd-party radars. Only one weather radar system may be interfaced
to the system. For detailed information on the operation of 3rd-party radars,
refer to their specific documentation.
• Bearing
Sec 8
Glossary
Refer to the GWX 68 documentation for additional information.
Sec 7
Symbols
An adjustment to any of these settings for one display will be simultaneously
reflected on the others.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-91
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.1.2
Independent Radar - GWX 70 Only
The GWX 70 allows all connected displays to show independent radar
sweeps. In the case when two displays have the same radar settings, the radar
sweep is identical on both displays.
Changes made to the following functions affect only the associated display.
• Mode
• Tilt
• On/Off controls
• Bearing
For example, the operating mode may be switched to Weather on one display,
while Ground Mapping mode is enabled on another.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
• Range
Figure 4-68 Ground Mapping Display
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-67 Weather Radar Display
4-92
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
When the GWX 70 is turned off on all displays, the “OFF” message appears
on the Advisory page of the GDU.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-69 Radar Off Advisory
Sec 5
Additional
Features
If the GWX 70 is turned off on the GDU, but another display is still actively
scanning, the “RADAR ACTIVE” advisory appears.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 4-70 Radar Active Advisory
Refer to the GWX 70 documentation for additional information.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-93
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 micro-seconds for
the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out and back for each nautical mile
of target range. It takes 123.6 micro-seconds for a transmitted pulse to make the
round trip if a target is 10 NM away.
The GWX weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather, not for
penetrating severe weather. The decision to fly into an area of radar targets
depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft capabilities and
pilot experience. Pulse type weather radar detects only precipitation, not clouds
or turbulence. The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns, but
this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly between them. Only Doppler radar
can detect turbulence.
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It
also has the ability to detect and provide distance to objects on the ground, such
as, cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
4.8.1.3
Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar
The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting and Ranging. Pulsed
radar locates targets by transmitting a microwave pulse beam that, upon
encountering a target, is then reflected back to the radar receiver as a return
“echo.” The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with
the most intense energy in the center of the beam and decreasing intensity near
the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and receiving. The
returned signal is then processed and displayed on the G500/G600 MFD.
4-94
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
4.8.1.4
Antenna Beam Illumination
It is important to understand the concept of the antenna beam illumination.
The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The farther the beam
travels, the wider it gets. The radar is only capable of “seeing” what is inside the
boundaries of the beam.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-71 Radar Beam from 12 inch Antenna
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
320 nm
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
The vertical dimensions of the radar beam are shown in the figure above and
the same holds true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam will
be as wide as it is tall. Note that it is possible not to see areas of precipitation on
the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the antenna tilt set to
zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 NM. The
curvature of the earth can also be a factor, especially at range settings of 150 NM
or more.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-72 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-95
Radar Signal Attenuation
The phenomena of weather attenuation needs to be kept in mind whenever
operating the weather radar. When the radar signal is transmitted, it is
progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening,
or attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.
Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the amount of radar
energy at a distance from the antenna is inversely proportional to the square of
the distance. The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills the
radar beam will be one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target 20
miles away. This would appear to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity
as the aircraft gets closer. Internal circuitry within the GWX system compensates
for much of this distance attenuation.
Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation.
It is also more intense. As the radar signal passes through moisture, a portion
of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However, much of the
energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the
signal may not reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather
radar system cannot distinguish between an attenuated signal and area of no
precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar will display a
“radar shadow.” This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the
heavy rain may extend much further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may
block another cell located behind the first, preventing it from being displayed
on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of
the heavy precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target
can be seen beyond the heavy cell. The WATCH™ feature of the GWX Weather
Radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas. Areas in question
will appear as “shadowed” or gray area on the radar display. Proper use of the
antenna tilt control can also help detect radar shadows.
Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the
radome. Even the smallest amount of wear and tear, pitting, and pinholes on the
radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.1.5
4-96
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Radar Signal Reflectivity
4.8.2.1
Precipitation
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as earth or solid
structures, will be detected by the weather radar. The weather radar will not
detect clouds, thunderstorms or turbulence directly. It detects precipitation
associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar signal
reflectors are raindrops, wet snow or wet hail. The larger the raindrop the
better it reflects. The size of the precipitation droplet is the most important
factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a small concentrated area are
characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong
return. Ice, dry snow, and dry hail have low reflective levels and often will not be
displayed by the radar. A cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog
or drizzle, will not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target
return.
Foreword
4.8.2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-73 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-97
Ground Returns
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the
radar beam strikes the ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective
properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so shorelines, rivers, lakes,
and cities are well defined. Increasing gain too much causes the display to fill in
between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.
Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and
structures provide good returns, small buildings can be shadowed from the
radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches, and shorter ranges
are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines
and edges of the city become more defined.
Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors,
and normally do not provide good returns. The energy is reflected in a forward
scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They can appear as dark
areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and
will provide stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.
Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block
the areas behind. However, over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be
reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off canyon walls using up all
or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from
this area causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a
pass where no pass exists.
4.8.2.3
Angle of Incidence
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of
Incidence. Incident angle (“A”) is illustrated below. This directly affects the
detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity of the displayed
target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable
range and lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.2.2
4-98
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Operating Distance
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (GWX 68)
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (Other Radars)
For more information about MPEL, refer to the appropriate documentation.
Appendix A
4.8.3.2
Sec 8
Glossary
The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard
of 1 mW/cm2, is the semicircular area of at least 11 feet from the 12 inch antenna
as indicated in the illustration below. All personnel must remain outside of
this zone. With a scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at
the Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL) boundary is significantly
reduced.
Sec 7
Symbols
4.8.3.1
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the
antenna for personnel near an operating airborne weather radar. The minimum
safe distance is based upon the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for general
population/uncontrolled environments which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory
Circular 20-68B for more information on safe distance determination.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.8.3
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation
and the target display will show a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is
reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the resulting detectable
range is increased for mountainous terrain.
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-74 Angle of Incidence
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-99
Sec 1
System
Foreword
MPEL
Boundary
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
11’ for 12” antenna
Figure 4-75 MPEL Boundary
4.8.4
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup
The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar
antenna tilt for most situations. It is not to be considered an all encompassing
setup that will work in all situations, but this method does provide good overall
parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the
antenna tilted so that the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel
with the ground. The following discussion explains one way of achieving this.
With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are
displayed at a distance that equals the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided
by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the tilt so the front
edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 NM. Note this antenna tilt angle
setting. Now, raise the antenna tilt 6º above this setting. The bottom of the radar
beam is now angled down 4º from parallel with the ground.
Practical Application Using the Basic Tilt Setup
At this point, when flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL,
any displayed target return should scrutinized. If the displayed target advances
on the screen to 5 NM of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or
ground returns that are 2,000 feet or less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna
tilt 4º can help separate ground returns from weather returns in relatively flat
terrain. This will place the bottom of the radar beam level with the ground.
Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.
4-100
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
Figure 4-76 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile
4.8.5.1
Weather Display Interpretation
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-101
Index
When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the
colors denote approximate rainfall intensity and rates as shown in the table
below.
Appendix A
Weather Mapping and Interpretation
Sec 8
Glossary
4.8.5
Sec 7
Symbols
This setup will provide a good starting point for practical use of the GWX
radar. There are many other factors to consider in order to become proficient at
using weather radar in all situations.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four
degrees below parallel with the ground, a target return at 10 NM is approximately
4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 NM, 8,000 feet; at 50 NM, 20,000 feet. In
other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being
displayed at 10 NM would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000
feet. If that ground target return moves to 5 NM, maximum distance below the
aircraft will be 2,000 feet.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
10 nm
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
+4°
+3°
+2°
+1°
0°
-1°
-2°
-3°
-4°
Sec 3
MFD
Change in Antenna Tilt
Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)
4000
Sec 2
PFD
Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground
returns can be monitored for possible threats. The relationship between antenna
tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals 100 feet of altitude
for every one nautical mile.
Sec 1
System
If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, set the displayed range to
60 NM. Closely monitor anything that enters the display.
Foreword
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets
to 30 NM or closer. This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that
the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.
Weather
Mode
Color
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
GWX 70 Radars
3rd Party
Radars
Radar Return
Level (see
radar documentation
for details)
Approximate
Intensity
Approximate
Rainfall Rate
(in/hr)
Approximate
Intensity
BLACK
< 23 dBZ
< .01
< 23 dBZ
0
GREEN
23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ
.01 - 0.1
23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ
1
YELLOW
33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
0.1 - 0.5
33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
2
RED
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
0.5 - 2
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
3
MAGENTA
50 dBZ and greater
>2
50 dBZ and greater
4
Sec 1
System
Foreword
GWX 68 Radars
WHITE
Turbulence Detection
Table 4-25 Precipitation Intensity Levels
4.8.5.2
Thunderstorms
Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud.
The more severe the drafts, the greater the number and size of the precipitation
droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations can be made from what
is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating
large amounts of precipitation), the turbulence is considered severe.
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands
or short distances suggest irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.
• Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence, as
well as heavy precipitation. Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management
may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity.
Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line), individual cells
may be in different stages of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense
targets may contain developing clouds not having enough moisture to produce
a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts.
Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe
turbulence.
Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as
“hooks,” “fingers,” or “scalloped” edges. These irregularities may be present in
green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should be treated as highly
dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they were red or magenta areas.
4-102
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Squall Line
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Hook or Finger
Sec 2
PFD
Steep Gradient
Scalloped Edge
Figure 4-77 Cell Irregularities
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a
short time. When displaying shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to
see if problems are developing further out. That can help prevent getting trapped
in a “blind alley” or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 8
Glossary
In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with
antenna tilt management to examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed
areas behind targets.
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-78 The “Blind Alley” Overhead View
Appendix A
Index
Figure 4-79 The “Blind Alley” Horizontal Scan
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-103
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
4.8.5.3
Tornadoes
There is no conclusive radar target return characteristics which will identify
a tornado, however, tornadoes may be present if the following characteristics
are observed:
• A narrow, finger-like portion, as shown on the previous page, extends and,
in a short time, curls into a hook and closes on itself.
• A “hook” which may be in the general shape of the numeral “6,” especially
if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in
the southern hemisphere) of a major thunderstorm.
• V- shaped notches.
• Doughnut shapes.
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, nor are tornado returns
limited to these characteristics. Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most
often have not shown shapes different from those of a normal thunderstorm
display.
4.8.5.4
Hail
Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore,
the higher the top of a thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains
hail. Vertically scanning the target return can give the radar top of a thunderstorm
that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by radar. It is
not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen
with the eyes in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual
top does not indicate the top of the hazardous area.
Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection.
It can have a film of water on its surface, making its reflective characteristics
similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of water, and because
hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large
amounts of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail
shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards or less) and make poor radar targets. In
the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are “dry” (no liquid coating), target
returns are less intense.
Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics
as tornados. U-shaped cloud edges 3 to 7 miles across can also indicate hail.
These target returns appear quite suddenly along any edge of the cell outline.
They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.
4-104
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.8.6
Radar Operation in Weather Mode
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It
is always a good idea to put the radar in Standby mode before taxiing the
aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop and
possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.
Foreword
WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When
transmitting while the aircraft is on the ground, no personnel or objects
should be within 11 feet of the antenna.
When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the
system automatically switches to Standby mode on landing.
Sec 3
MFD
Antenna
Stabilization
Operating
Mode
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Weather Alert
(GWX Only)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Control
Window
Precipitation
Scale
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-80 Horizontal Scan Display
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-105
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.8.6.1
Displaying Weather on the Weather Radar Page
NOTE: Distances on the Weather Radar page are always shown in NM.
1. While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group, press the MODE
soft key.
2.
While on the ground, press the STANDBY soft key. A warm-up period is
initiated (countdown is displayed on the screen - GWX radars only). After the
warm-up is complete, the radar enters the Standby Mode.
3. When the aircraft is airborne, press the WEATHER soft key.
1. Select the WEATHER soft key. A confirmation window is displayed.
Figure 4-81 Caution for Radar Activation Confirmation
2. Turn the large MFD Knob to highlight YES and press the ENT key to continue
radar activation.
OR
1. If the aircraft is airborne, select the WEATHER soft key. A warm-up period is
initiated (countdown is displayed on the screen - GWX radars only). After the
warm-up is complete, the radar begins transmitting.
2. Press the RNG keys to select the desired range.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
OR
4-106
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4.8.6.2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-82 Vertical Scan Display
Vertically Scanning a Storm Cell
(Not available with all radars)
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft
wings level to avoid constant adjustment of the Bearing Line.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
When vertically scanning with stabilization ON, the actual physical area
that the radar is sweeping may not match the GDU vertical scan display. This
occurs whenever the aircraft pitch is not at 0 degrees. To compensate for this,
the GDU vertical display will “erase” the portion of the vertical display that is
no longer being scanned. It will appear that the vertical sweep “wraps around”
when reaching the end of the GDU vertical display. The radar is simply “erasing”
the portion of the vertical display that is not currently being scanned.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-107
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
1. While in the Horizontal Scan view, press the CONTROL and then the BRG soft
keys. This displays the Bearing Line.
OR
Press MENU and turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the “Show
Bearing Line” menu item and press the ENT key. This displays the Bearing
Line.
2. Press the MFD knob to activate the Bearing Line Adjustment in the Control
window. Turn the Large MFD knob to highlight the Bearing value.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
3. Turn the small MFD knob to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or
other area to be vertically scanned.
Figure 4-83 Bearing Line Adjustment
4. Press the VERTICAL soft key. A vertical “slice” of the selected area will now be
displayed.
5. With the Bearing value still highlighted, the small MFD Knob may be used to
move the scanned “slice” a few degrees right or left.
6. Press the RNG keys to adjust the range.
7. Press the MFD Knob to remove the cursor.
8. To select a new area to be vertically scanned, select the HORIZON soft key to
return to the Horizontal Scan view and repeat the previous steps.
4.8.6.3
Adjusting the Antenna Tilt Angle
In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam
should be pointed at the wet part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall
intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just below the freezing level of
the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical
scan to get a more accurate view of the coverage and intensity of the target in
the horizontal scan.
4-108
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2. With the Tilt value highlighted in the Control window, turn the small MFD knob
to adjust the Tilt.
Foreword
Adjusting Antenna Tilt on the Horizontal Scan Display
1. Press the MFD knob.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Press MENU and turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the “Show Tilt
Line” menu item and press the ENT key. This displays the Tilt Line.
4.8.6.4
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Tilt value.
Adjusting Gain
NOTE: Gain can be adjusted in Weather mode on the GWX radars only.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-109
Index
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode will cause precipitation
intensity to be displayed as a color not representative of the true intensity.
Remember to return the gain setting to: “Calibrated” for viewing the actual
intensity of precipitation.
Appendix A
Gain adjustment is shown in the Gain bar graph. The white reference line on
the right side of the bar graph indicates the calibration reference point.
Sec 8
Glossary
The gain is used to adjust the sensitivity of the radar receiver. It can be used
to adjust the characteristics of the returns.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. Press the MFD knob to activate the Tilt Adjustment in the Control window. Turn
the large MFD knob to highlight the Tilt value.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
OR
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Adjusting Antenna Tilt on the Vertical Scan Display
(Not available with all radars)
1. While in the Vertical Scan view, press the CONTROL and then the TILT soft
keys. This displays the Tilt Line.
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-84 Adjusting Tilt
Foreword
Sec 1
System
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Manual Gain” and press ENT. This will
highlight the Gain value in the Control window.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Gain.
OR
1. Press the MFD knob and turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Gain value
in the Control window.
Figure 4-85 Highlight Gain Cal Value
2. Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Gain Cal value. Press the MFD knob
again to accept the value and end editing.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
1. While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group, press the MENU
key.
Restore Calibrated Gain
1. While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group, press the MENU
key.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Restore Calibrated Gain” and press
ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-86 Adjust Gain Cal Value
4-110
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 4-87 Restore Calibrated Gain
OR
4.8.6.5
Sector Scan - GWX Radars Only
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Press the GAIN CAL soft key to restore the calibrated gain value. Press the
MFD knob again to accept the value and end editing.
Sec 3
MFD
1. While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group, press the
CONTROL soft key.
Adjusting the Sector Scan reduces the scan angle from Full in increments of
±20°, ±40°, and ±60° in horizontal scanning. Sector scanning is not available for
vertical scanning.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1. While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group, press the
CONTROL soft key.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3. Turn the small MFD knob to place the Bearing Line in the desired position. The
location of the Bearing Line will become the center point of the Sector Scan.
Sec 8
Glossary
4. Turn the large MFD knob to place the cursor in the SECTOR SCAN field.
Sec 7
Symbols
2. Press the BRG soft key to display the Bearing Line.
Appendix A
Index
Figure 4-88 Sector Scan - Full
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-111
Figure 4-89 Sector Scan - 40°
6. If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the
center of the Sector Scan.
7. Remove Sector Scanning by returning the SECTOR SCAN value to FULL.
2. To activate or deactivate the antenna stabilization, press the STAB ON soft key
to activate antenna stabilization or press the STAB OFF soft key to deactivate.
The current stabilization condition is shown in the upper right of the weather
radar display.
4.8.6.7
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.8.6.6
Antenna Stabilization
1. While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group, press the
CONTROL soft key.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5. Turn the small MFD knob to select FULL, 60°, 40°, or 20° scan.
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight - GWX Radars Only
While in horizontal scan mode, the Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
(WATCH™) feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible
inaccuracies in displayed intensity due to weakening of the radar energy. This
weakening is known as “attenuation.” The radar energy weakens as it passes
through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation, and
distance. Issues with the radome will also attenuate the radar energy. All these
factors have an effect on the return intensity. The more energy that dissipates, the
lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy of the displayed intensity
of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions
with this information in mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be
employed to determine the extent of attenuation in a shaded area.
1. While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group, press the
CONTROL soft key.
2. To activate or deactivate the WATCH™ feature, press the WATCH soft key.
4-112
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Weather Alert - GWX Radars Only
If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a weather alert can be generated by
ground returns.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Weather Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy radar returns
beyond the currently displayed range. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands
along the outer range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4.8.6.8
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 4-90 Horizontal Scan without WATCH™ Figure 4-91 Horizontal Scan with WATCH™
Sec 7
Symbols
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-113
Index
2. To activate or deactivate Weather Alerts, turn the large or small MFD knob to
highlight either “Enable Weather Alert” or “Inhibit Weather Alert.”
Appendix A
If a Weather Alert is detected within ±10° of the aircraft heading, an text alert
will be displayed on the MFD in the Alerts Window. These text Weather Alerts
can be deactivated without deactivating the red bands on the radar display.
1. While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group, press the MENU
key.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-92 Weather Alert Display
Foreword
1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, turn the small or large MFD knob to
highlight Enable Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT) and then press ENT.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
4.8.6.9
Altitude Compensated Tilt - GWX 70 Only
Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT) automatically adjusts the tilt to compensate
for altitude changes as you climb or descend.
Figure 4-93 Weather Radar Page Menu
2. To deactivate ACT, repeat the sequence.
4.8.6.10 Turbulence Detection - GWX 70 Only (Optional)
Turbulence Detection activates a feature that detects and displays severe
turbulence. Turbulence Detection is inactive at ranges greater that 160 NM. This
optional feature requires a separate enablement. See your dealer for details. If
Turbulence Detection is enabled and available, Turbulence Detection will be
reported as Inactive in any of the following conditions:
• Scan orientation is not Horizontal
• Scan range is greater than 160 NM
• Radar mode is not Weather
1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, turn the small or large MFD knob to
highlight Enable Turbulence Detection and then press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
2. To deactivate Turbulence Detection, repeat sequence.
4.8.6.11 Ground Clutter Suppression - GWX 70 Only (Optional)
Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) reduces the amount of returns as a result
of highly reflective objects on the ground, such as buildings or cities, while
maintaining the intensity and size of weather returns. This optional feature
requires a separate enablement. See your dealer for details.
4-114
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2. To deactivate Ground Clutter Suppression, repeat the sequence.
Ground Mapping and Interpretation
3rd Party Radars
Level
BLACK
0 dB
0
LIGHT BLUE
> 0 dB to < 9 dB
1
9 dB to < 18 dB
2
18 dB to < 27 dB
3 and above
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
YELLOW
MAGENTA
Sec 5
Additional
Features
GWX Radars Intensity
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Ground Map
Mode Color
Sec 3
MFD
Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode. Different
colors are also used to represent the intensity levels. The displayed intensity of
ground target returns are defined in the following table. Use of the GAIN and
TILT controls will help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be
recognized more easily. As previously discussed, the type and orientation of the
target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity displayed.
Sec 2
PFD
A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain.
This can be a useful tool for verifying aircraft position. A “picture” of the ground
is represented much like a topographical map that can be used as a supplement
to the navigation map on the MFD.
Sec 1
System
4.8.7
Foreword
1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, turn the small or large MFD knob to
highlight Enable Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) and then press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
BLUE
27 dB and greater
Not Used
Table 4-26 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels
1. Press the MODE soft key.
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Press the GROUND soft key to place the radar in Ground Map mode. A pop-up
regarding caution in operating radar on the ground will appear. Turn the large
MFD knob to highlight “YES” and then press ENT.
Appendix A
Index
Figure 4-94 Ground Radar Operation Caution
3. Press the BACK soft key.
4. Press the MFD knob to activate the cursor.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-115
Foreword
5. Turn the large MFD knob to place the cursor in the TILT field.
6. Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the small MFD knob to display ground
returns at the desired distance.
4.9
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Garmin Connext Satellite Services (GCSS) is an optional feature
available with the Iridium satellite system that is interfaced through
the optional Garmin GSR 56. The primary maps for viewing Connext
Weather data are the Weather Data Link Pages in the Map Page Group.
These are the only GDU 620 map displays capable of all available weather
products. The WX Weather pages may be oriented to either Track Up or
North Up. Both Connext and SiriusXM Weather may be installed and
selected individually. Connext Weather coverage is available throughout
most of Europe, Canada and the U.S. Additional radar coverage areas are
being added continuously. Selection of the Weather Source is made on the
Aux - System Setup page.
More detail on Garmin Connext Weather products and coverage can be
found at: https://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/connext/worldwide-weather/
NOTE: A system can be configured for both SiriusXM and Connext Weather,
but both cannot be displayed a the same time.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Garmin Connext Satellite Services (Optional)
NOTE: Garmin Connext Satellite Services was formerly called GFDS and
may still display as GFDS on GDUs.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
7. Press the MFD knob to remove the cursor.
4-116
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.9.1
Connext Weather Registration
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
4. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Register With GFDS.” Press ENT.
Foreword
4.9.1.1
Registering Connext Weather
It is necessary to register the GDU to utilize the weather products.
1. Visit flyGarmin.com to create a Connext Weather account. Provide the GDU
System ID and airframe info (model, tail number, etc).
2. An access code will be issued to enter on the GFDS Registration page.
3. While viewing a WX Map page of the WX page group, press the MENU key to
display the Page Menu Options.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-95 Select Registration
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
5. Turn the small MFD knob to select values and the large MFD knob to move to
the next position. Highlight REGISTER and press ENT to complete the process.
The GDU will contact the Connext servers using the GSR 56 transceiver. If the
access code and system ID are correct, it will download and display the airframe
info.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 4-96 Registration Page (Default and Completed)
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-117
Foreword
Sec 1
System
4.9.1.2
Deactivating Unit Registration
Registration of the GDU unit can be deactivated so that the unit can no longer
make requests. This does not cancel the subscription.
1. While viewing a WX Map page of the WX page group, press the MENU key to
display the Page Menu Options.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Register With GFDS.” Press ENT.
4. Any weather requests will now fail and the system will no longer be linked to the
account.
4.9.2
Using Weather Products
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the
Navigation Map Page, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age of
the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled
on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at
selectable intervals.
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the 30, 60, 90,
or 120 minute Expiration Time intervals, the data is considered expired and is
removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with
what is currently being broadcast by Garmin Connext Weather Services. If more
than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received,
the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
4.9.3
Customizing the Weather Map
Each Wx Map page may be customized individually. The Wx Map pages are
customized by selecting options from the Page Menu. The Page Menu options
include choices for Weather Setup and displaying the Weather Legends. The
Weather Setup choice covers selections for adjusting the viewing ranges of the
weather products.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
3. With the Access Code field highlighted, press CLR to remove the access code.
Index
NOTE: If multiple weather sources are installed, then the weather
source must first be selected on the AUX System Setup page. Refer to
section 3.2.1.10.
4-118
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
1. While viewing a WX Map page of the WX page group, press the MENU key
to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 4-97 Weather Page Menu Options
Sec 3
MFD
2. With the Weather Setup Menu displayed, turn the Large MFD knob to select
the desired item.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired weather feature option.
4. Press ENT to save a selection.
5. Turn the large MFD knob to the next desired option or press the small MFD
knob to cancel and return to the Connext Weather Data Link Map Page.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-98 Weather Data Link Setup Menu Options
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-119
Menu Item
Adjustment
Map Orientation
PRECIP Data Viewing Range
PRECIP Legend
IR SAT Data Viewing Range
Lightning Data Viewing Range
SIG/Air Viewing Range
PIREPS Viewing Range
METAR Data Viewing Range
Wnd Aloft Data Viewing Range
TFR Data Viewing Range
North Up, Track Up
Off, 50 NM to 500 NM
On/Off
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Off, 10 NM to 500 NM
Table 4-27 Weather Page Menu Setup Options
4.9.4
Data Request
It is necessary to request the downloading of weather products. Requests can
be sent manually or set to automatically update at a selected rate.
1. While viewing a WX Map page of the WX page group, press the MENU key to
display the Page Menu Options.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “GFDS Data Request.” Press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
WX Page Menu - Weather Setup
Figure 4-99 Select Data Request
3. Turn the small MFD knob to select values and the large MFD knob to move to
the next position.
4-120
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-100 Data Request Page
Data Request Coverage
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “GFDS Data Request.” Press ENT.
4. The Present Position box will be checked and weather information will be
requested around your present position.
Sec 8
Glossary
5. To deselect Present Position reporting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
“Present Position.” Press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Present Position.” Press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Present Position Data Request
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.9.4.1
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-121
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
2. The Destination box will be checked and weather information will be requested
around your flight plan destination.
3. To deselect Destination reporting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight
“Destination.” Press ENT.
Flight Plan Data Request
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Flight Plan.” Press ENT.
2. The range list will now be highlighted. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight
the desired range and press ENT.
Figure 4-101 Flight Plan Data Request
3. The Flight Plan box will be checked and weather information will be requested
along your flight plan forward of your present position for the range selected.
4. To deselect Flight Plan reporting, turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Flight
Plan.” Press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Destination Data Request
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Destination.” Press ENT.
4-122
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2. The Waypoint Selection field will now be highlighted. Turn the small MFD
Sec 1
System
knob to select the first character. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the
next character. When finished selecting the waypoint name, press ENT.
Foreword
Waypoint Data Request
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Waypoint.” Press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3. The Waypoint box will be checked and weather information will be requested
around the selected waypoint for the range selected (next operation).
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-102 Waypoint Data Request
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-123
Width field will now be highlighted.
Figure 4-103 Waypoint Data Request Range
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired Diameter/Route Width and then
press ENT.
4.9.4.2
Data Request Auto Request
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Auto Request - Update Rate.”
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select “Off” or an Update Rate. When finished
selecting the Update Rate, press ENT. The Update Rate will default to “OFF”
at each power cycle.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Diameter/Route Width Data Request
1. After selecting a coverage option in the previous section, the Diameter/Route
Index
Figure 4-104 Data Request Auto Update Rate
4-124
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.9.4.3
Data Request Manual Request
Sec 1
System
1. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight “Manual Request - Send Req.”
Foreword
Connext Weather data may be updated at any time regardless of the automatic
update timing by selecting a Manual Request. When multiple requests are made,
some products are merged with the old data (SIGMETs/AIRMETs, TAFs, TFRs,
and METARs), but the old data of other products is discarded.
2. Press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
3. The update request will occur immediately. The action will be noted in the
4.9.4.4
Data Request Status Window
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-125
Index
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix A
2. With the “Map Orientation” option active, turn the small MFD knob to change
the highlighted value.
Sec 8
Glossary
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages.
1. While viewing the Weather Map 1, 2, or 3 of the Wx page group, press the
MENU key. With “Weather Setup” highlighted, press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
Weather Page Map Orientation
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Request Status window will show a response such as “OK” when manual
requests are made. The time for the next auto update will be shown.
4.9.5
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Request Status window. The Auto Request time will be reset to the selected
value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-105 Manual Data Request
Precipitation Data Viewing Range
The Precipitation (PRECIP) Viewing Range option allows you to select the
map range where at and below the selected value PRECIP weather products will
be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off
is selected, PRECIP weather data will not be shown. In the figure below where
500 NM is selected, PRECIP data will be shown at map ranges of 500 NM and
lower. TFRs and METARs are the only weather products shown below 10 NM.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.9.6
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Coverage Boundary
Figure 4-106 PRECIP Weather Map Display and Legend
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The Weather Setup option will
be highlighted. Press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight PRECIP Data Viewing Range. Turn the
small MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-126
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.9.7
PRECIP Legend
Foreword
The PRECIP Legend selection provides the option of displaying an abbreviated
version of the PRECIP legend in the top right region of the MFD. The full legend
is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 4-107 PRECIP Legend
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight PRECIP Legend.
Sec 3
MFD
1. While viewing a Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the MENU
key to display the Page Menu Options. The Weather Setup option will be
highlighted. Press ENT.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-127
Infrared Satellite Data Viewing Range
Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) data is available over North America and Europe
and depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery. Brighter cloud top
colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes. Information is
updated every half hour.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.9.8
Figure 4-108 GCSS Infrared Satellite Data Map Display and Legend
IR SAT Data Viewing Range
The IR SAT Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below that value IR SAT weather products will be shown on the
selected MFD Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, IR SAT will
not be shown. For the selected value (such as 250 NM) is selected, IR SAT data
will be shown at map ranges of the selected value (250 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing a Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the MENU
key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight IR SAT Data Viewing Range. Turn the
small MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-128
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.9.9
Data Link Lightning Viewing Range
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Data Link Lightning (DL LTNG) shows the approximate location of cloudto-ground lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred
within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the lightning strike is not
displayed. Only cloud to ground strikes are reported in the US and extreme
southern Canada (cloud to cloud strikes are not reported).
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 4-109 Data Link Lightning and Legend
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-129
Index
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Appendix A
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 8
Glossary
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight DL LTNG Data Viewing Range.
Sec 7
Symbols
1. While viewing a Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the MENU
key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight
the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
The Lightning Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value Lightning weather products will be shown on the selected MFD
Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, Lightning will not be shown.
Where a value (such as 250 NM) is selected, data will be shown at map ranges
of the selected value (250 NM) and lower.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.9.10
SIGMETs and AIRMETs
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s
METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather
considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued for
hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
Cursor Location
Sec 2
PFD
Product Age
Sec 3
MFD
IFR Line
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Cursor On AIRMET/SIGMET Line
Sec 5
Additional
Features
SIGMET Line
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Icing
Figure 4-110 Weather Page - AIRMETs/SIGMETs
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather to all aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust,
and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is
every 12 minutes in the U.S. Elsewhere, updates are made as they are issued.
Index
Appendix A
Viewing Textual SIGMETs/AIRMETs
Textual SIGMET/AIRMETs can be viewed by selecting an SIGMET/AIRMET
line on the Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a SIGMET/AIRMET line. Press ENT.
2. The Waypoint Information page for that line will now be shown. Press the WX
soft key to view weather information.
4-130
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 4-111 Weather - AIRMETs/SIGMETs Detail and Legend
Sec 5
Additional
Features
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
• Icing
• Turbulence
• IFR conditions
• Mountain obscuration
• Surface winds
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range
The SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value SIGMET/AIRMET products will be shown
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
SIGMET/AIRMET will not be shown. Where a value (such as 250 NM) is
selected, SIGMET/AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of the selected
value (250 NM) and lower.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-131
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight SIG/AIR Viewing Range.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
AIREP/PIREP
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a
particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or
forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A
PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low inflight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued
as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Product Age
Cursor Location
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
4.9.11
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Selected PIREP
PIREP Detail
Figure 4-112 Weather - AIREPs/PIREPs
4-132
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the PIREPS Viewing Range value.
Sec 2
PFD
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 1
System
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Foreword
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Viewing Textual AIREPs/PIREPs
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Sec 3
MFD
Textual AIREPs/PIREPs can be viewed by selecting an AIREP/PIREP on the
Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with an AIREP/PIREP. Press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-113 Weather - AIREPs/PIREPs Detail and Legend
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-133
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are generally updated hourly, but some site are more frequent. Special
updates are done as conditions warrant. METARs typically contain information
about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud
heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain information
on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown
as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Cursor Location
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
METARs
Sec 1
System
4.9.12
IFR METAR
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
VFR METAR
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Selected METAR (LIFR)
Index
Appendix A
Figure 4-114 Weather - Graphic METARs
4-134
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Viewing Textual METARs
2. The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag. Press ENT.
Foreword
Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather
(WX) pages.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-115 Weather - METARs Detail and Legend
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-135
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
METAR Viewing Range
The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, METARs will
not be shown. Where a value (such as 150 NM) is selected, METAR data will be
shown at map ranges of the selected value (150 NM) and lower.
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight METAR Data Viewing Range.
4-136
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.9.13
Winds Aloft
Sec 1
System
Selected Altitude
Foreword
Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from
the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL. Pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up soft
keys steps down or up in 3,000 foot increments.
Product Age
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Present Position
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Winds Aloft Symbol
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Winds Aloft Altitude Soft Keys
Figure 4-116 Weather - Winds Aloft
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-117 Weather - Winds Aloft Legend
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-137
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range
The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear
on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Winds Aloft will not be shown. Where 150 NM is selected, Winds Aloft data will
be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower.
1. While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. Turn the large MFD knob to
highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range.
4-138
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.9.14
TFRs
Foreword
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions. The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TFR Detail
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Select TFR Symbol
To View Details
Appendix A
2. Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-139
Index
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Weather Map page.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 8
Glossary
1. While viewing a Weather Map page of the WX page group, turn the large MFD
knob to highlight the TFR Data Viewing Range option.
Sec 7
Symbols
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects whether
TFR information is shown on the Weather Map. TFR information will be shown
at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the information will
not be shown. For the value (such as 500 NM) selected, TFR information will be
shown at map ranges of that value (500 NM), and lower.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-118 Weather - TFRs
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Viewing Textual TFRs
Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather (WX)
pages.
1. While viewing a Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to move
the cursor to highlight a TFR symbol (yellow circle). Press ENT.
2. The TFR details will be shown.
Figure 4-119 Weather - Textual TFRs and Legend
4.10 FIS-B Weather (Optional)
WSR-88D weather surveillance radar or NEXRAD (NEXt generation RADar) is
a Doppler radar system that has greatly improved the detection of meteorological
events such as thunderstorms, tornadoes, and hurricanes. An extensive network
of NEXRAD stations provides almost complete radar coverage of the continental
United States, Alaska, and Hawaii. The unobstructed range of each NEXRAD is
124 nautical miles. The ADS-B/FIS-B receiver sends the FIS-B information to
the GDU 620.
NOTE: The ADS-B/FIS-B receiver will send all FIS-B weather and
NOTAM/TFR information that it receives. There may be more information
available than is received by the ADS-B/FIS-B receiver. This can lead to the
ADS-B/FIS-B receiver, and subsequently the GDU 620, displaying the status
of the FIS-B data as “received” and “current” even though some of the
data for the region is missing.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
3. Press the small MFD knob or ENT to return to the Weather page.
4-140
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.10.1
NEXRAD Abnormalities
Index
4-141
Appendix A
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 7
Symbols
Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities (reflectivity)
measured in dBZ (decibels of Z). “Reflectivity” is the amount of transmitted power
returned to the radar receiver. Reflectivity (designated by the letter Z) covers a
wide range of signals (from very weak to very strong). So, a more convenient
number for calculations and comparison, a decibel (or logarithmic) scale (dBZ),
is used. The dBZ values increase as the strength of the signal returned to the
radar increases.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NEXRAD Intensity
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.10.3
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Where it is noted that NOTAM data is available, it is possible only
a subset of the data is available and that more NOTAM reports may arrive
in future updates. Updates occur approximately every ten minutes.
Sec 3
MFD
Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays. Some, but
not all, are listed for the user’s awareness:
• The Regional NEXRAD “pixels” are 1.5 minutes (1.5 nautical miles
= 2.78 km) wide by 1 minute (1 nautical miles = 1.852 km) tall. The
CONUS NEXRAD “pixels” are 7.5 minutes (7.5 nautical miles = 13.89
km) wide by 5 minutes (5 nautical miles = 9.26 km) wide. Above 60
degrees of latitude the Regional NEXRAD “pixels” are 3 minutes/nautical
miles. CONUS NEXRAD is not available above 60 degrees of latitude.
The intensity level reflected by the pixel will be the highest level sampled
within the area covered by each pixel.
Sec 2
PFD
NEXRAD Limitations
Sec 1
System
4.10.2
Foreword
There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images. Some,
but not all, causes of abnormal displayed information include:
• Ground Clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly at the sun
• Military aircraft deploy metallic dust which can cause alterations in radar scans
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Scheduled maintenance may put a radar off-line
NEXRAD
When enabled, NEXRAD weather information is shown. Composite data
from all of the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is
composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The
display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather level severity.
Refer to the legend for a description of the color code.
The NEXRAD option has selections of Regional, CONUS, or Combined
NEXRAD. CONUS NEXRAD includes a composite of available NEXRAD radar
imagery across the 48 states. Regional NEXRAD is a composite of available
NEXRAD radar imagery in a local area, showing a more detailed image
than CONUS NEXRAD. FIS-B weather data reception requires line-of-site
communication between the receiver and the ADS-B ground station. Incomplete
Regional and/or CONUS NEXRAD imagery displayed on the MAP and FIS-B
Weather Pages of the affected products is an indicator of poor FIS-B reception.
Affected Areas
Any area in the continental United States (CONUS) or Alaska where the
distance from ADS-B ground stations, or the combined effect of distance and
low altitude, is sufficiently great may cause poor reception. A good source of
information for ground station coverage can be found at: https://www.faa.gov/
Reception will improve in some affected areas as the FAA completes the
NextGen ADS-B ground station infrastructure. However, due to line-of-sight
broadcast characteristics, operators with properly installed and functioning
equipment may still receive incomplete FIS-B data when signal reception is
limited by the distance from ground stations combined with a low altitude.
4.10.5
NEXRAD Weather Setup
1. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, press the Menu key.
2. With the Weather Setup selection highlighted, press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.10.4
4-142
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.10.5.1
Weather Page Map Orientation
The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages.
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather Map 1, 2, or 3 of the Wx page group, press
the MENU key. With “Weather Setup” highlighted, press ENT.
Foreword
2. With the “Map Orientation” option active, turn the small MFD knob to change
the highlighted value.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 4-120 Weather Page Map Orientation
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 7
Symbols
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. The NEXRAD Data Viewing Range value will be highlighted. Turn the small
MFD knob to highlight the desired value.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4.10.5.2 NEXRAD Data Viewing Range
The NEXRAD Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range
where at and below the selected value NEXRAD weather products will be shown
on the selected MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
NEXRAD weather data will not be shown. Where a value (such as 250 NM) is
selected, NEXRAD data will be shown at map ranges of that value (250 NM)
and lower.
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 3
MFD
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-143
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
4.10.5.3
NEXRAD Legend
The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an
abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD.
The full legend is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key.
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Legend value.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On. Press ENT to accept the
displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 4-121 FIS-B NEXRAD Precipitation and Legend
4-144
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.10.5.4
NEXRAD Source
Foreword
Selecting NEXRAD in the FIS-B Weather Menu
1. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, press the Menu key.
2. With the Weather Setup selection highlighted, press ENT.
Sec 3
MFD
Continental US NEXRAD (CONUS)
The Display CONUS NEXRAD selection shows NEXRAD radar information
for the entire continental United States. CONUS NEXRAD data is updated every
15 minutes.
Sec 2
PFD
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired Source option and press ENT.
Sec 1
System
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Viewing Range Source
option.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-122 FIS-B CONUS NEXRAD
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-145
The Regional NEXRAD selection shows available regional NEXRAD radar
information from reporting ground stations within 500 NM of the aircraft
location.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Regional NEXRAD
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-123 FIS-B Regional NEXRAD
4-146
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Combined NEXRAD
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Regional NEXRAD data and CONUS NEXRAD data are shown together. The
two types of NEXRAD are separated by a white stippled border. This boundary
is updated whenever new Regional or CONUS NEXRAD data is received. The
radius of the boundary is fixed at 150 NM.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
CONUS Data Area
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Regional Boundary
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-124 FIS-B Combined NEXRAD
SIGMETs and AIRMETs
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-147
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Appendix A
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather to all aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust,
and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is
every 12 minutes.
Sec 8
Glossary
SIGMETs
(SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs
(AIRmen’s METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous
weather considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued
for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
Sec 7
Symbols
4.10.5.5
Foreword
Cursor Location
Sec 1
System
Turbulence Line
Cursor On AIRMET/SIGMET Line
Sec 2
PFD
Surface Winds Line
Figure 4-125 FIS-B - AIRMETs/SIGMETs
The SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the
map range where at and below that value SIGMET/AIRMET products will be
shown on the selected MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off
is selected, SIGMET/AIRMET will not be shown. For a value selected (such as,
150 NM), SIGMET/AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of that value
(150 NM), and lower.
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
IFR and Mountain Obscured Line
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the SIGMET/AIRMET Viewing Range
value.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
4-148
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Viewing Textual SIGMETs/AIRMETs
Sec 1
System
2. The Waypoint Information page for that line will now be shown. Press the WX
soft key to view weather information.
Foreword
Textual SIGMET/AIRMETs can be viewed by selecting an SIGMET/AIRMET
line on the Map or Weather (WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a SIGMET/AIRMET line. Press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 4-126 FIS-B AIRMETs/SIGMETs Detail and Legend
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
Sec 8
Glossary
• Icing
• Turbulence
Appendix A
• IFR conditions
• Mountain obscuration
• Surface winds
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-149
AIREP/PIREP
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a
particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or
forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A
PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low inflight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued
as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the PIREPS Viewing Range value.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Product Age
Cursor Location Info
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.10.5.6
Selected PIREP
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
PIREP Detail
Figure 4-127 FIS-B AIREPs/PIREPs
4-150
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Viewing Textual AIREPs/PIREPs
2. Press ENT or the small MFD knob to return to the Weather page.
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight a AIREP/PIREP. Press ENT.
Foreword
Textual AIREPs/PIREPs can be viewed by selecting an AIREP/PIREP on the
Map or Weather (WX) pages.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-128 FIS-B AIREPs/PIREPs Detail and Legend
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-151
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are updated hourly and are considered current. METARs typically
contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation,
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also
contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Cursor Location
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Foreword
METARs
Sec 1
System
4.10.5.7
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Selected METAR (VFR)
Figure 4-129 FIS-B Weather - Graphic METARs
METAR Viewing Range
The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where
at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected
MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected, METARs will
not be shown. For a value (such as 150 NM) selected, METAR data will be
shown at map ranges of that value (150 NM), and lower.
4-152
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the METAR Data Viewing Range value.
Sec 2
PFD
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Sec 1
System
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
Foreword
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
Viewing Textual METARs
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
2. The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown. Press the
WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint.
Sec 3
MFD
Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather
(WX) pages.
1. While viewing a Map or Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to
move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag. Press ENT.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 4-130 FIS-B Weather - Textual METARs
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-153
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-131 FIS-B Weather - Winds Aloft Legend
The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map
range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear
on the selected MFD FIS-B Weather Map page (1, 2, or 3). When Off is selected,
Winds Aloft will not be shown. For the value (such as 150 NM) selected, Winds
Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of that value (such as 150 NM), and
lower.
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, press the
MENU key to display the Page Menu Options. The cursor flashes on the
“Weather Setup” option. Press ENT.
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range
value.
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value. Press ENT to accept
the displayed value. The next option will be highlighted.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from
the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL by pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up
soft keys.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4.10.5.8
4-154
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.10.5.9
FIS-B TFRs
Foreword
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Select TFR Outline
To View Details
TFR Detail
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Appendix A
2. Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value.
3. Press ENT to accept the displayed value.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-155
Index
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to
the FIS-B Weather Map page.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 8
Glossary
1. While viewing a FIS-B Weather Map page of the WX page group, turn the large
MFD knob to highlight the TFR Data Viewing Range option.
Sec 7
Symbols
The Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) viewing range option selects
whether TFR information is shown on the FIS-B Weather Map. TFR information
will be shown at and below the selected map range. When Off is selected, the
information will not be shown. For the value (such as 500 NM) selected, TFR
information will be shown at map ranges of that value (500 NM), and lower.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-132 FIS-B Weather - TFRs
Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather (WX)
pages.
1. While viewing a Weather page, Use the small and large MFD knobs to move
the cursor to highlight a TFR outline (yellow circle). Press ENT.
2. A summary of the TFR will be shown and the first TFR will be highlighted. In
the case of multiple TFRs, turn the small or large MFD knobs to highlight the
desired TFR.
3. Press the VIEW TEXT soft key to view the full TFR text.
4. Press ENT to return to the Weather page.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Viewing Textual TFRs
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 4-133 FIS-B Weather - Textual TFRs and Legend
4-156
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
4.11 StormScope
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
For lightning display interpretation, study the examples in the WX-500
Pilot’s Guide that are designed to help you relate the cell or strike patterns shown
on the display to the size and location of thunderstorms that may be near your
aircraft.
Sec 1
System
The WX-500 StormScope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather
avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms
within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft. StormScope measures relative bearing
and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports the
information to the display. Interfaces are currently only available for the WX500 StormScope System.
Foreword
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed description of the
WX-500 StormScope.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Figure 4-134 Stormscope
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
4-157
Symbol
Time Since Strike (Seconds)
Foreword
Less than 6
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Less than 60
Less than 120
Less than 180
Table 4-28 Stormscope Symbols
Mode
Sec 3
MFD
The Mode selection allows you to select the display of storm cells or strikes.
View
The Mode selection allows you to select 360° or Arc views.
Clearing the StormScope Page
Routinely clearing the StormScope Page of all discharge points is a good
way to determine if a storm is building or dissipating. In a building storm
discharge points reappear faster and in larger numbers. In a dissipating storm
discharge points appear slower and in smaller numbers.
NOTE: When Heading is not available (N/A), the pilot must clear the strikes
after each turn.
Index
2. Lightning strikes will be cleared from the display and the Rate value will be
reset.
Appendix A
1. While viewing the Weather StormScope page, press the Clear key to clear
lightning strikes.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Cell mode uses a clustering program to identify clusters of electrical
activity that indicate cells. Cell mode is most useful during periods of heavy
storm activity. Displaying cell data during these periods frees the user
from sifting through a screen full of discharge points and helps to better
determine where the storm cells are located.
4-158
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5
ADDITIONAL FEATURES (OPTIONAL)
Sec 2
PFD
Additional features of the GDU 620 include the following:
Sec 1
System
NOTE: ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a
Garmin dealer.
Foreword
NOTE: The availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic
form may not preclude the requirement to carry paper charts aboard the
aircraft. See the AFMS for more information.
• ChartView and FliteCharts electronic charts
• SafeTaxi diagrams
Sec 3
MFD
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• SiriusXM WX Satellite Weather (covered in Section 4.7)
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Traffic (covered in Sections 4.5 and 4.6)
• Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information
at more than 700 airports in the United States. By decreasing the range on an
airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the airport layout
can be seen.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the
GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles more than 170 channels of music, news,
and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices and
longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal
procedures charts. Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to
essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be configured in the
system.
XM WX Satellite Weather is an optional service that provides the ability to
display graphic weather data overlaid on the MFD Nav Map and Weather Data
Link pages.
Appendix A
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS or TIS traffic data in relation to
the aircraft’s current position and altitude. The Traffic option is designed to assist
in detection and avoidance of other aircraft.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-1
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
5.1
FliteCharts and ChartView
When the Chart feature is available, charts will be shown on the third page
of the Flight Plan page group. The Chart page will default to the nearest airport
if no flight plan or destination airport is present. While you are on the ground,
the displayed charts will default to the current airport location regardless of
flight plan.
Both ChartView and FliteCharts may be geo-referenced. The icon will have
an “x” through it the selected chart does not support geo-referencing.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to
the G500/G600. SVT is displayed as a forward-looking display of the topography
immediately in front of the aircraft. SVT information is shown on the primary
flight display (PFD).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: The availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic
form may not preclude the requirement to carry paper charts aboard the
aircraft. See the AFMS for more information.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
NOTE: The Chart feature provides a digital representation of a paper
chart and provides no vertical or lateral course guidance. Flight Plan and
Procedures are separate from charts, and do provide vertical and lateral
course guidance for the loaded route or procedure shown on the Flight Plan
page. The term “Chart Unavailable” means that the chart cannot be viewed
on the Chart page due to either a chart not being published, or an error
in the chart database, but does not preclude its availability or inclusion of
the procedure in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The
absence of a chart for a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach does
not preclude its availability or inclusion in the Flight Plan. The absence of
a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach under the Flight Plan does not
preclude the ability to view the chart.
Index
Appendix A
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground
maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the
requirements of AC 20-159 and are not qualified to be used as an airport
moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by
the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot
situational awareness during ground operations.
5-2
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will
automatically be selected.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-1 ChartView Chart Page
Figure 5-2 FliteChart Chart Page
1. Turn the large MFD knob to the Flight Plan (FPL) page group.
5.1.1
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2. Turn the small MFD knob to the Chart page.
ChartView (Optional)
• Departure Procedures (DP)
Index
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
• Chart NOTAMs
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Appendix A
• Arrivals (STAR)
Sec 8
Glossary
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc.
ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer.
Available data includes:
Sec 7
Symbols
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures
charts. The charts are displayed in full color with high-resolution. The MFD
depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view of
approach charts and on airport diagrams.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-3
The ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable
during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date.
ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no longer available
for viewing upon reaching the disable date. When turning on the GDU 620, the
Power-up Page indicates any of nine different possible criteria for ChartView
availability. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page
displays and the definition of each.
5.1.2
FliteCharts
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of FAA-published terminal procedures
charts. FliteChart data may also be provided by sources other than the FAA. The
charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. The
MFD FliteCharts depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
plan view of approach charts.
FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data
includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams (not geo-referenced)
Cycle Number and Revision
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during
a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date.
FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the
GDU 620, the Power-up page indicates any of five different possible criteria for
chart availability. These indications are whether the databases are not configured,
not available, current, out of date, or disabled. See table 5-1 for the various
FliteCharts Power-up page displays and the definition of each.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Cycle Number and Revision
5-4
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.1.3
Chart Database Type
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Select the DBASE soft key for scrolling through the database information.
Scroll through the database with the MFD knob or ENT key.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to select AUX.
2. Press the DB ACTV key to view the databases.
3. Press the small MFD knob and then turn the small or large MFD knobs to
highlight Chart Type. The field will show Not Available, ChartView, or FliteCharts.
Foreword
Determining Chart Database Type, Coverage,
and Currency
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-3 ChartView Database Information
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-4 FliteChart Database Information
The date currency of the installed chart databases are shown both during
power-up and on the AUX - System Status page.
Appendix A
NOTE: Messages displayed in yellow also appear in a message banner
along the bottom of the Chart page.
Sec 8
Glossary
Chart Currency
Sec 7
Symbols
Chart Coverage
The chart databases cover the area that was selecting during the download
process. FliteCharts will note the region covered by the installed chart database;
ChartView does not.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-5
Database is active.
Database’s expiration date is the
current day. [1]
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 2
PFD
Definition
Database’s effective date is in
the future. [2]
Database’s effective date is the
current day. [1] [2]
Current date is unknown (e.g.,
no GPS fix yet).
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Power-up Page Display
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Database’s expiration date has
passed. Expired notes that the
database expired less than 70
days ago, but may still be used.
Database’s disable data has
passed. Disabled notes that the
database expired more than
70 days ago and is no longer
available for use.
System is verifying database
when new cycle is installed.
Database verification failed.
Sec 8
Glossary
No database is installed.
Index
Appendix A
Blank line. GDU 620 system
is not configured for any
chart data. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for
configuration.
[1] When the effective or expiration date is the current day, the following message is
displayed at the bottom of the page: “Check local rules for database effective times.”
[2] ChartView does not have “Effective” dates.
Table 5-1 Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
5-6
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.1.4
Selecting a Chart
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
5.1.4.1
Selecting FliteCharts or ChartView
When configured during installation and when both chart types are available,
you can select which chart type will be used. Only one chart type can be used
at a time.
Sec 1
System
The G500/G600 will only allow the pilot to select the chart type in normal
mode if it is configured for ChartView. When in-air, the pilot cannot select the
field to change the chart source, and a small message is displayed underneath the
Chart Type line that reads “Chart Type can only be changed when on ground”.
The ability to select a chart type is absent from normal mode if configured for
FliteCharts.
Foreword
NOTE: When the charts database synchronizes with another LRU, and
Chart Streaming is not available, a message banner at the bottom of the
Chart page displays “Getting newer charts.” This process can take several
minutes.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Chart Type sections.
Turn the small MFD knob to select ChartView or FliteCharts.
Press the ENT key to save the selected value.
Changing chart type requires a restart of the unit. With OK selected, press the
ENT key to restart the unit and change to the selected chart type.
Sec 7
Symbols
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-5 Chart NOTAM
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 5-6 Changing Chart Type
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-7
Selecting a New Chart by FPL, NRST, or RECENT
You may select other charts to display based on your flight plan (FPL), charts
of the nearest airport (NRST), or your most recently selected airports (RECENT).
Figure 5-7 Chart Category Selection
1. While viewing the Chart page of the FPL page group, press the SELECT soft
key.
2. Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise to show FPL, NRST, or RECENT.
3. Turn the large MFD knob to select the desired identifier and then press ENT.
5.1.4.3
Selecting a Chart Manually
A chart for a different airport may be chosen by selecting the identifier for
the desired airport.
Airport Identifier Selection
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.1.4.2
Figure 5-8 Airport Identifier Selection
5-8
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
2. Use the small MFD knob to change the character.
Foreword
1. While viewing the Chart page of the FPL page group, press the SELECT soft key
to change the airport.
3. Use the large MFD knob to move the cursor to highlight a character.
Sec 1
System
4. Press ENT to accept the selected airport.
5.1.4.4
Chart Auto-Selection
Sec 3
MFD
NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will
automatically be selected.
Sec 2
PFD
The Chart page will automatically select a chart to display when the page is
opened.
• While on the ground, the nearest airport diagram will be displayed.
• If an approach is loaded in the selected GPS navigator, the chart for that
approach will be displayed. In some cases, the pilot may be prompted to
select the correct chart from a list of possible matches.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• If an approach is not loaded, the airport diagram for the destination
airport will be displayed.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• The aircraft takes off or lands
1. While viewing the Chart page of the FPL page group, press the SELECT soft key
to activate chart selection.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-9
Index
2. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the field to the right of the airport
identifier.
Appendix A
• A new or different approach is loaded
Sec 8
Glossary
When the pilot has manually selected a chart to display, a different chart will
not be automatically selected until one of the following events occurs:
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: Automatic chart selection only occurs when the Chart page is
opened. For example, if a new approach is loaded while the Chart page is
open, a different MFD page must be selected and the Chart page re-opened
for the new approach chart to be automatically displayed.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• If no destination airport exists, the nearest airport diagram will be
displayed.
Figure 5-9 Activate Chart Selection for the Current Airport (ChartView)
4.
Press ENT to accept and view the selected chart.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
3. Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired chart.
5-10
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-10 Selected Chart for the Current Airport (ChartView)
Using Charts
5.1.5.1
Chart Zooming and Panning
NOTE: Panning mode is indicated by the presence of scroll bars.
Sec 7
Symbols
Chart zooming and Panning allows viewing charts closer to examine details.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
More detail on the displayed chart can be viewed by zooming in with the
Range keys and moving the chart around with pan mode. The Detail soft key
allows access to more details for the currently displayed chart.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
5.1.5
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-11
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Horizontal Scroll Bar
Figure 5-11 Zooming and Panning Around a Chart
2. After zooming in, you may only see part of the chart. Press the small MFD knob
to enter Pan mode and activate scroll bars on the edges of the chart. Turn the
large and small MFD knobs to move around the chart.
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel the scroll bars and exit panning.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 5
Additional
Features
1. While viewing the Chart page of the FPL page group, press the RNG (Range)
keys to zoom in and out.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Vertical Scroll Bar
5-12
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.1.5.2
Viewing Chart Details in ChartView
NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will
automatically be selected.
Foreword
NOTE: Chart details are only available for instrument approach procedure
charts. Chart details are not available for airport diagrams or SID/STAR
charts.
Sec 1
System
1. Press the Detail key to view detailed views of the current chart. The Detail key
is only available with ChartView.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 5-12 Selected Chart for the Current Airport (ChartView)
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-13
Figure 5-13 Detail of the Selected Chart
(Header Shown)
3. Press the Back key to return to the view of the full chart.
Foreword
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
2. Press the Header, Plan, Profile, or Minimums keys to view detailed
sections for the chart for those topics. An aircraft icon will show in the lower
right corner of the display if your aircraft is in the chart area.
5-14
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
2. With the Minimums Source highlighted, select the Altitude Minimums Alerter
source with small MFD knob.
Foreword
5.1.5.3
Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter
1. While viewing the Chart page of the FPL page group, press the Menu key. With
the Set Minimums item highlighted, press ENT.
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 5-14 Minimums Source Selection
Sec 3
MFD
3. Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Altitude Minimums value. Turn the
large and small MFD knobs to change the Altitude Minimums value and then
press ENT to activate the selected value.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-15 Minimums Altitude Selection
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: If you highlight the Minimums Altitude field on the FPL page and
press the CLR key, it will turn the minimums functionality off.
Sec 7
Symbols
In dual installations, the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from
either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft
reaches 150 feet above the MDA. The Minimum altitude will be available in the
Altitude Alerter.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-15
Foreword
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
5.1.5.4
Viewing Chart NOTAMs
If an active NOTAM (Notice to Airmen) exists for the selected chart, the
NOTAM soft key will be available. Press the NOTAM soft key to view the
NOTAM or select View NOTAMs from the Chart Options menu.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-16 Chart NOTAM
5-16
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.1.5.5
Day/Night View
Sec 1
System
When AUTO is selected, it allows the user to set a threshold for the transition
between the Day and Night color schemes.
Foreword
Chart pages can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night
viewing. The Day View offers a better presentation in a bright environment. The
Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark environment. .
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 5-17 Chart Color Scheme Auto Selection and Aux Display Brightness
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
NOTE: Once an adjustment is made to the percentage field in Auto mode,
the chart must be redrawn (zoomed in or out, or another chart selected)
before the switch from Day to Night is seen.
Sec 3
MFD
The threshold is compared to the Display Brightness Level that is displayed
on the Aux System Setup page. If the color scheme percentage on the Chart
Setup page is less than the display brightness percentage selected on the Aux
System Setup page, then the Chart AUTO Color Scheme will draw the chart as
though the NIGHT scheme were selected. Otherwise, the AUTO scheme will
draw the chart as though the DAY scheme were selected.
1. In the FPL page group, turn the small MFD knob to reach the Chart page.
2. Press MENU to display the Options menu.
3. Press ENT to go to Chart Setup. The Color Scheme option will be highlighted.
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select Day - AUTO - Night.
5. If Auto is selected, turn the large MFD knob CW to the percentage value and
turn the small MFD knob to change the value.
6. Press the small MFD knob or the ENT key to save the selected value and return
to the Chart page.
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-17
SafeTaxi
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when zooming
in on airports at close range. The airport display on the map reveals runways
with numbers, taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots,
and airport landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other
prominent features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. When the aircraft
location is within the screen boundary, including within SafeTaxi ranges, an
aircraft symbol is shown on any of the navigation map views for enhanced
position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting
taxiways and runways, and/or complex ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are
outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are
defined with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion.
Selected Hot
Spot - Press ENT
for Details
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.2
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Taxiway
Identification
Hot Spot
Outline
DCLTR Soft Key
Removes Taxiway
Markings
Figure 5-18 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for
ground maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply
with the requirements of AC 20-159 and are not qualified to be used as
an airport moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview are to
be used by the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to
improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Aircraft
position
5-18
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.2.1
Using SafeTaxi
• VOR Information Page
• Airport Information Page
• User Waypoint Information Page
Sec 2
PFD
• Intersection Information Page
Appendix A
2. Turn the MFD knobs to move the cursor on the Hot Spot border or into the Hot
Spot area and then press the ENT key.
Sec 8
Glossary
Hot Spots can contain more information about the area that can be displayed
when selected.
1. While viewing the Hot Spot area on the Navigation Map page, press the small
MFD knob to activate the cursor.
Sec 7
Symbols
Hot Spot Information
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
5.2.1.2
Sec 5
Additional
Features
The DCLTR soft key (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and
DCLTR-3 each time the soft key is selected for easy recognition of decluttering
level. Selecting the DCLTR soft key removes the taxiway markings and airport
feature labels. Selecting the DCLTR-1 soft key removes VOR station ID, the
VOR symbol, and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Selecting
the DCLTR-2 soft key removes the airport runway layout, unless the airport
in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 soft key
cycles back to the original map detail. With Auto-Zoom enabled, the map will
automatically zoom to 1 NM and DCLTR-0 upon landing so SafeTaxi can be
viewed. For additional information, refer to section 3.1.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Decluttering
Sec 3
MFD
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to
taxiways, runways, and airport features. When panning over the airport, features
such as runway holding lines and taxiways are shown.
5.2.1.1
Sec 1
System
• Weather Data Link Page
Foreword
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi®
airport layout within the maximum configured range. The following is a list of
pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• NDB Information Page
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-19
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Hot Spot Name Location Info
Hot Spot
Information
Figure 5-19 SafeTaxi Hot Spot Information
3. An information window will be shown on the MFD. After viewing, press the
small MFD knob, CLR, or ENT keys to remove the information window. Press
the small MFD knob again to cancel the cursor.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Aircraft Location Cursor Hot spot
Border
5-20
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.2.2
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
The SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available
for use after the expiration date. When turning on the GDU 620, the Power-up
Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
The Power-up Page shows the SafeTaxi database is current when the “SafeTaxi
Expires” date is shown in white. When the SafeTaxi cycle has expired, the
“SafeTaxi Expires” date appears in yellow. The message “SafeTaxi: N/A” appears
in white if no SafeTaxi data is available on the database card.
Sec 3
MFD
SafeTaxi Database Status
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-20 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the
database cycle can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. SafeTaxi
information appears in white and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in
white when data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the
effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in white when data is current and in
yellow when expired. SafeTaxi REGION NOT AVAILABLE appears in white if
SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card. Expired SafeTaxi data is never
disabled.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-21
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment
NOTE: Refer to section 4 for information about SiriusXM WX Satellite
Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A
Data Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The
GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services at any
altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is not available
on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances
without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites,
coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio services
are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
https://www.siriusxm.com/sxmaviation.
5.3.1
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either
one or two coded IDs, depending on the equipment. Either the Audio Radio
ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription. The SiriusXM Satellite
Radio Activation Instructions are included with the unit (also available at
flyGarmin.com, P/N 190-00355-04).
SiriusXM Satellite Radio and Weather subscriptions are sold separately. It is
not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions
with the GDL 69A. Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite
Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation signal that, when
received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be
located.
5-22
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
If XM WX Satellite weather services have not been activated, the weather
product names will be displayed in gray (see below) on the XM Information
Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of
the Weather Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the
groupings of weather products available for subscription.
Foreword
NOTE: The LOCK soft key on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page
Group) is used to save GDL 69A activation data when the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio services are initially set up. It is not used during normal
SiriusXM Satellite Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects
if inadvertently selected during flight. Refer to the GDL 69/69A SiriusXM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev G, or later) for
further information.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-23
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Information
The Aux mode XM Information page displays information about the SiriusXM
Satellite radios, service class, and products when the GDL 69/69A is installed
and the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is activated. The Data and Audio radios
have separate Identification Numbers. The Service Class determines the features
that are available. Products that are not part of the subscription are displayed in
gray. Products that are part of the active subscription, but are waiting to receive
data are white. Products that are part of the active subscription and have data
are green.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3.2
1. In the AUX page group, turn the small MFD knob to display XM Information.
2. The LOCK soft key is used to “lock” your SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription
activation. This is only used for the initial subscription or to make a change.
NOTE: Refer to the GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation
Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev G, or later) for further information.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 5-21 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Information
5-24
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.3.3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
The information on the SiriusXM Satellite Radio display is composed of
four areas: the Active Channel, Available Channels, Category of the highlighted
channel, and the Volume setting. The Active Channel window shows the
Channel Name and Number, Artist, Song Title, and Category.
Foreword
Audio entertainment is available through the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A. The GDU 620 serves
as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A. SiriusXM
Satellite Radio allows you to enjoy a variety of radio programming over long
distances without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signal
from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. When enabled,
the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in Aux page group.
1. Turn the large MFD knob to Aux Mode.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Turn the small MFD knob to the XM Radio page.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Active Channel
Window
Channel Scroll Bar
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Available Channel
Window
Selected Channel
Sec 7
Symbols
Volume Bar Graph
Page Name
Soft Keys
Appendix A
Figure 5-22 SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Sec 8
Glossary
Category Window
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-25
Foreword
Sec 1
System
1. While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the CATGRY
soft key to activate Category selection.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired category. When the MFD knob
is turned to select a category, the soft keys will not be shown.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
5.3.3.1
Channel Categories
The Category window displays the currently selected category of audio.
Categories of channels, such as Jazz, Rock, or News, can be selected to list the
available channels for a type of music or other contents.
Figure 5-23 XM Category List
Figure 5-24 XM Category Soft Keys
3. Press ENT to display the list of channels for the highlighted category in the
Channels window.
4. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing.
OR
1. Press CATGRY and then the CAT + or CAT – soft keys to increment up or
down one category at a time.
2. Press ALL to show the channels for all categories. Use the large and small MFD
knobs to select desired channel.
3. Press ENT to save the selection or press the small MFD knob to cancel
selection.
5-26
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
Active Channel Number
Artist Name
Category
Foreword
5.3.3.2
Selecting a SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel
The Channel feature is used to navigate through the channels in the selected
category.
Active Channel Name
Song Title
Sec 2
PFD
New Selected Channel
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
2. Press ENT to make the highlighted channel the Active Channel.
6. Press ENT to save the selection or press the small MFD knob to cancel
selection.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-27
Index
5. Press CHNL and then the DIR CH soft key to directly select a channel in the
active category. Use the large and small MFD knobs to select desired channel.
Appendix A
OR
4. Press CHNL and then the CH + or CH – soft keys to increment up or down one
channel at a time in the active category.
OR
Sec 8
Glossary
3. Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing.
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: A delay of several seconds may occur when selecting a channel.
The listed title may end before the radio begins playing the current Active
Channel material.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
1. While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the small MFD
knob and then turn the small MFD knob to select the desired channel.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-25 XM Channel Selection
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Volume
The Volume control allows you to set the audio volume level, as well as mute
the audio.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3.3.3
Volume Soft Key Label
Figure 5-26 XM Radio Volume Setting
1. While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the VOL soft
key.
2. Press the VOL + or VOL – soft keys, or turn the small MFD knob, to adjust the
radio volume.
Volume Bar Graph
Volume Soft Key Labels
Figure 5-27 XM Radio Volume Controls
3. Press MUTE to mute the radio volume.
4. Press MUTE again or the VOL + or VOL – soft keys to unmute the radio
volume.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Volume Bar Graph
5-28
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.3.3.4
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel Presets
Foreword
The PRESET soft key allows you to store the Active Channel into a selected
preset position for easy later recall. A delay of several seconds can occur when
setting or recalling a preset.
Sec 1
System
Active Channel
Number and Name
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Active Channel
and Song Title
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Feature Tip
Preset Soft Keys
2. Press and hold a preset soft key, such as PS1.
2. Press the preset soft key for the desired stored channel, such as PS1.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Index
3. Press the MORE soft key to display the next series of presets.
Appendix A
Recalling a Preset
1. While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, press the PRESETS
soft key.
Sec 8
Glossary
3. Press the MORE soft key to display the next series of presets.
Sec 7
Symbols
Setting a Preset
1. While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group, you may set a preset
for the Active Channel. Press the PRESETS soft key.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure 5-28 XM Radio Presets
5-29
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.3.4
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver
Troubleshooting
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the
possible cause of a failure.
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is
installed has subscribed to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied
to the Data Link Receiver
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX System Status Page for Data Link Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number,
and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the GDL 69/69A
the status will be marked with a red “X.”
1. Turn the large MFD knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2. Turn the small MFD knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the
AUX Page Group).
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
• Ensure the SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription has been activated
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
GDL 69 Status OK
Index
LRU Selection
Figure 5-29 LRU Status Window
5-30
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.4
Autopilot Operation
GAD 43 Attitude
Autopilot Disconnect
Sec 7
Symbols
NOTE: Only appears with the installation of an optional GAD 43
Adapter.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
When the GDU 620 attitude monitors have detected an AHRS malfunction,
or the inability to actively monitor the AHRS, a “Check Attitude” annunciation
will be displayed on the PFD and the autopilot will automatically disconnect.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
CAUTION: Do not use the autopilot if the AP TEST does not disengage
the autopilot normally.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
3. Press the AP TEST soft key and verify that the autopilot disconnects normally.
Sec 3
MFD
2. Engage the autopilot while on the ground.
Sec 2
PFD
The GAD 43 Adapter may Optionally provide attitude information from
a Garmin Attitude and Heading Reference System to certain autopilots. The
GAD 43 has the ability to disconnect the autopilot if an error in the GAD 43
output or AHRS is detected. This disconnect mechanism must be tested prior to
each flight in the following manner:
1. Allow all avionics to complete power up and begin normal operation.
Sec 1
System
5.4.1
Foreword
The G500/G600 is able to interface to certain autopilot systems to provide the
functions described in this section. Please refer to your particular Airplane Flight
Manual and autopilot documentation for specific information and operating
instructions.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Figure 5-30 - Check Attitude - Autopilot Automatically Disconnected
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-31
Foreword
Fly the aircraft manually and crosscheck the GDU 620 attitude indication
with the standby attitude indicator and other sources of attitude information
(airspeed, heading, altitude, etc.).
Heading
The GDU 620 heading bug may be used in conjunction with the “Heading”
mode of supported autopilots. When the autopilot is in “heading” mode and
the heading bug is adjusted in the normal manner, and the autopilot will turn
to and maintain the selected heading. Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and
autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the autopilot
heading mode.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
5.4.2
Figure 5-31 Adjusting the Heading Bug
5.4.3
Altitude Capture (Optional Upgrade)
The GDU 620 altitude bug may be used to automatically capture a selected
altitude with certain autopilots. Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and
autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the altitude
preselect feature, if available.
Adjust the altitude bug in the normal manner when using the altitude capture
interface. Some autopilot installations support arming and disarming of the
selected altitude using the ALT key on the PFD. The PFD knob window will
indicate when this function is available. The selected altitude may be alternately
armed or disarmed by pressing and holding the ALT key on the PFD bezel.
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Selected Heading Box
Index
Figure 5-32 Pressing and Holding the ALT Key to Arm/Disarm the Selected Altitude
5-32
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.4.4
Autopilot Navigation
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Wpt 3
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Aircraft
Present
Position
Sec 7
Symbols
Wpt 1
Figure 5-33 GPSS Turn Anticipation
5.4.4.1
Autopilot Operation with GPSS Enabled Autopilots
5-33
Index
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix A
NOTE: GPSS commands are not sent to the autopilot when a VLOC source
is displayed on the HSI.
Sec 8
Glossary
Some autopilots have built-in support for GPS Steering (GPSS) commands
from a GPS navigator. The GDU 620 will send the GPSS commands from the
displayed GPS source to the autopilot. For example, if GPS 1 is displayed on the
HSI, the GPSS commands from GPS 1 will be sent to the autopilot. Refer to the
Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on
how to use the autopilot’s GPSS function.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Turn
Anticipation
Curve
Sec 3
MFD
Flight Plan Leg 2
Flight Plan Leg 1
Sec 2
PFD
Wpt 2
Sec 1
System
GPS Steering (GPSS) provides roll command signals calculated by the GPS
navigator to the autopilot in order to allow the aircraft to anticipate turns, make
smooth transitions when passing waypoints, and fly leg types such as Procedure
Turns and Holding Patterns. The autopilot must have the ability to interpret the
GPSS commands. The G500/G600 can provide GPSS information to autopilots
that have built-in support for GPSS commands, as well as to older autopilots
that do not have built-in support for GPSS.
Foreword
The HSI may be used in conjunction with the appropriate navigation modes
of supported autopilots. The GDU 620 provides the autopilot with the selected
course and lateral/vertical deviations. The GDU 620 acts as a switching source
between the installed navigation sources (e.g GPS/VLOC, 1-2). The navigation
source that is displayed on the HSI is sent to the autopilot. Refer to the Airplane
Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to
use the autopilot navigation functions.
GPSS OFF
GPSS ON
Figure 5-34 GPSS Mode Control with the HDG Key
When GPSS mode is on, the heading bug on the HSI changes to a hollow
outline and a crossed-out heading bug appears in the PFD Knob Mode Indicator,
indicating that the autopilot is not coupled to the heading bug. The bug is still
controllable and may still be used by the pilot for reference. GPSS is annunciated
in the lower left portion of the PFD. The GPSS mode annunciation depends on
the location of the NAV STATUS information, as shown in the following figure.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
5.4.4.2
Autopilot Operation with the GDU 620 Emulating GPSS
In order to provide GPSS functionality for autopilots that do not have built-in
GPSS support, the GDU 620 can convert the GPSS commands into a heading
signal. When GPSS mode is turned on, the autopilot heading mode will follow
the GPSS commands instead of the heading bug. Refer to the Airplane Flight
Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the
autopilot heading mode.
Depending on the installation, GPSS mode may be toggled on/off with an
external switch or by pressing and holding the HDG key on the PFD. If the
installation uses the HDG key on the PFD, the PFD knob window will display
the GPSS/HDG mode options.
NAV Status Style 1
NAV Status Style 2
Figure 5-35 GPSS Mode Annunciations
5.4.5
Flight Director Display
If autopilot flight director commands are interfaced to the G500/G600, they
will be presented as a single cue flight director on the PFD. Control of the flight
director is accomplished via the autopilot/flight director controller; there are no
pilot controls or adjustments for the flight director on the G500/G600.
5-34
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The G500/G600 system limits the distance the flight director pitch commands
may deviate from the aircraft attitude icon. In the event that the pitch command
provided by the autopilot flight director is greater than the distance allowed by
the G500/G600, the command bars will be displayed at the maximum distance
allowed by the G500/G600. As the aircraft pitch changes to satisfy the command
bars, the bars will continue to be displayed at the maximum distance from the
aircraft attitude icon until the aircraft pitch deviation is within the command
display limit.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
SVT Off
SVT On
Figure 5-36 Flight Director Bars Showing Aircraft Pitch
Vertical Speed Control
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Adjust the vertical speed bug in the normal manner when using the
vertical speed mode interface. Some autopilot installations support engaging/
disengaging the vertical speed mode using the VS key on the PFD. The PFD
knob window will indicate when this function is available. The vertical speed
mode may be alternately engaged or disengaged by pressing and holding the VS
key on the PFD bezel.
Sec 7
Symbols
The GDU 620 vertical speed bug may be used to control vertical speed with
certain autopilots. Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system
documentation for instructions on how to use the vertical speed mode, if
available.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
5.4.6
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Index
Figure 5-37 Pressing and Holding the VS Key to Engage/Disengage VS mode
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-35
Foreword
Autopilot Mode Annunciations
Some autopilots support mode annunciations located at the top of the PFD.
Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for
details on the autopilot mode annunciations.
Sec 1
System
5.4.7
When autopilot annunciations are displayed at the top of the PFD, the Nav
Status information will be located to the left of the HSI (NAV STATUS Style 2).
Autopilot Status
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Roll Modes
Pitch Modes
Active Mode
Armed Mode
Active Mode
Armed Mode
Figure 5-38 Autopilot Annunciations on Top of PFD
5.4.7.1
GFC 500/600 Annunciations
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Roll Modes
Autopilot Status
Pitch Modes
Active Mode
Armed Mode
Active Mode
Armed Mode
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-39 GFC Autopilot Annunciations
Mode Annunciations
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
AP
CWS
Autopilot
Control Wheel Steering
PFT
YD
Preflight test in progress
Yaw Damper
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 5-2 Autopilot Status Annunciations
5-36
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Lateral Mode Annunciations
GPS
GS
IAS
LVL
PIT
VNAV
VPTH
VS
Glideslope
Indicated Airspeed
Level Hold
Pitch Hold
Vertical Navigation
Vertical Path
Vertical Speed
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Localizer Approach
Localizer Navigation
Navigation
Roll Hold
VOR Approach
VOR Navigation
Sec 3
MFD
NAV
ROL
VAPP
VOR
Altitude Hold
Selected Altitude Capture
Approach
Go Around
Glidepath
Sec 2
PFD
LOC
ALT
ALTS
APR
GA
GP
Sec 1
System
HDG
LVL
Backcourse Navigation
GPS Approach
GPS Navigation
Heading
Level Hold
Foreword
BC
Vertical Mode Annunciations
Table 5-3 Lateral and Vertical GFC Annunciations
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-37
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.4.8
Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP™)
WARNING: Do not assume ESP will provide stability protection in
all circumstances. There are in-flight situations that can exceed the
capabilities of ESP technology.
The GFC 500/600 supports ESP. The ESP feature is intended to monitor
the aircraft and provide control input feedback when necessary to discourage
operating the aircraft at potentially unsafe attitudes and/or airspeeds. This feature
will only function when the aircraft is above 200 feet AGL and the autopilot is
not engaged.
The servo torque limit is configured such that when ESP is active the pilot can
always overpower the servo and hand-fly the aircraft. Refer to Garmin GFC 600
Pilot’s Guide and G5 Electronic Flight Instrument Pilot’s Guide for Certified Aircraft
for details on ESP functionality.
5.4.8.1
Roll Engagement
Roll Limit Indications display on the roll scale to indicate where ESP will
engage. As roll attitude exceeds the limit, ESP will engage and the Roll Limit
Indicator will move in indicate where ESP will disengage as roll attitude
decreases.
Once engaged, ESP force will be applied. The force increases as roll attitude
increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended
to encourage pilot input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude.
As roll attitude decreases, ESP will disengage.
5.4.8.2
Pitch Engagement
ESP pitch engagement thresholds are configured for each airframe type.
Thresholds are established for both nose-up and nose-down attitudes. Most
aircraft are configured such that the torque applied by ESP increases to its
maximum value when pitch attitude has exceeded the configured nose-up or
nose-down pitch limits. The opposing force increases or decreases depending
on the pitch angle and the direction of pitch travel. This force is intended to
encourage movement in the pitch axis in the direction of the normal pitch
attitude range for the aircraft. As the pitch attitude moves back towards the
normal envelope the ESP force ramps down to zero and disengages when pitch
is less than the configured nose-up and nose-down pitch limits.
5-38
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
ESP will disengage if the aircraft exceeds the ESP engagement limits.
5.4.8.3
Foreword
There are no indications marking the pitch ESP engage and disengage limits
in these nose-up/nose-down conditions.
Airspeed Protection
Sec 1
System
CAUTION: Low Speed ESP is only supported with a valid terrain
database. All other ESP modes are functional at any altitude.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Refer to the the AFMS for the High Airspeed ESP limits of a specific aircraft.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Exceeding the airspeed limit will result in ESP applying force to raise the nose
of the aircraft. When the high airspeed condition is remedied, ESP force is no
longer applied.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
High Speed Protection
Sec 3
MFD
Low Speed Protection is inhibited when the aircraft is below 200’ above
ground level. If the AFCS is not receiving height above ground information from
an external source, Low Speed Protection will not be available.
Sec 2
PFD
Low Speed Protection
When the stall warning system determines a stall condition is imminent, ESP
will engage and apply a force in the nose down direction. After stall warning
becomes inactive, the force will smoothly be reduced to zero and ESP will
disengage.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-39
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Flight Path Marker
• Terrain Alerting
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Obstacle Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Water
• Airport Signs
• Zero-Pitch Line
• Runway Display
SVT offers a three-dimensional view of terrain and obstacles. Terrain and/
or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft in flight are shaded yellow or red.
NOTE: SVT will become disabled if the databases necessary to display
SVT are unavailable (generating a GDU DB ERR or SVT DISABLED alert) or
AHRS or GPS data is unavailable.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Synthetic Vision Technology (Optional)
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to
the G500/G600. SVT is displayed as a forward-looking display of the topography
immediately in front of the aircraft. SVT information is shown on the primary
flight display (PFD). The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude,
heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a database of terrain, obstacles,
and other relevant features.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.5
Figure 5-40 Synthetic Vision Imagery - PFD
5-40
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.5.1
SVT Operation
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
HRZN and APTSIGNS soft keys are dependent upon the state of the SYN
TERR soft key. When Synthetic Terrain is deactivated, the SYN TERR soft
key appears illuminated while the remaining SVT soft keys are unavailable for
selection and subdued (black with dark-gray characters). If Synthetic Terrain
is deactivated, all other SVT features are also deactivated. With Synthetic
Terrain activated, all other SVT features may be turned on or off at the pilot’s
discretion.
Sec 1
System
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of soft keys. The PFD soft key
leads into the PFD function soft keys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the
SYN VIS soft key enables synthetic vision and displays the SYN TERR, HRZN
HDG, and APTSIGNS soft keys. The BACK soft key returns to the previous
level of soft keys.
Foreword
SVT™ is activated from the PFD using the soft keys located along the bottom
edge of the display. Pressing the soft keys turn the related function on or off.
• SYN TERR soft key enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• HRZN HDG soft key enable horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS soft key enables airport signposts.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Index
Figure 5-41 SVT Soft Keys
5-41
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.5.2
Activating and Deactivating SVT
NOTE: In some instances, such as temporary loss of GPS signal, the SVT
functionality will be disabled.
To enable SVT:
1. Press the PFD soft key.
Sec 2
PFD
2. Press the SYN VIS soft key.
3. Press the SYN TERR soft key to view the SVT display.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
When SVT™ is enabled, the pitch ladder will display a different pitch scale.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Figure 5-42 Pitch Scale with SVT Enabled
Figure 5-43 Pitch Scale with SVT Disabled
5-42
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.5.3
SVT Features
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Traffic
Flight Path Marker
Sec 2
PFD
Zero-Pitch Line
(ZPL) with Horizon
Heading Marks
Sec 3
MFD
Aircraft Symbol
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Synthetic Terrain
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
SVT Soft Keys
Figure 5-44 SVT on Primary Flight Display
NOTE: SVT features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude
deviation information using the CDI, VSI, and VDI presentations.
Appendix A
Flight Path Marker
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-43
Index
The Flight Path Marker (FPM) is also known as a Velocity Vector. It is displayed
on the PFD at ground speeds above 30 knots. The FPM depicts approximate
projected path of the aircraft.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
5.5.3.1
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, terrain,
obstacle, and traffic avoidance. Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to
situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy
or reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or maneuvers to
avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
Horizon Heading
Figure 5-45 Horizon Heading
5.5.3.4
Airport Signs
Airports Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and
identification on the synthetic terrain display. When activated, the signs appear
on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 NM from an airport and
disappear at approximately 4.5 NM. Airport signs are shown without the
identifier until the aircraft is approximately 9 NM from the airport. Airport signs
are shown behind the airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and
deactivated by pressing the APT SIGNS soft key.
Airport Sign without Identifier
(Between 9 NM and 15 NM)
Airport Sign with Identifier
(Between 4.5 NM and 9.0 NM)
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
5.5.3.2
Zero-Pitch Line
The Zero-Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and provides a
reference line by which to judge aircraft attitude with respect to the horizon. It
is not necessarily aligned with the terrain horizon, particularly when the terrain
is sloped or mountainous.
5.5.3.3
Horizon Heading
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows compass
headings in 30-degree increments on the Zero-Pitch Line. Horizon heading tick
marks and digits appearing on the zero-pitch line are not visible when they are
behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is activated and
deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG soft key.
Figure 5-46 Airport Signs
5-44
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
5.5.3.5
Runway Depiction
Sec 2
PFD
Without a loaded flight plan, a runway is shown as dark gray with the
boundaries of the runway in light gray.
Sec 1
System
Runways are shown on the PFD in various ways. Soft surface runways, such
as grass runways, are depicted in green. Hard surface runways, such as asphalt,
are depicted in gray. Your flight plan will determine how the runway is displayed
on the PFD.
Foreword
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole
means for determining the proximity of the aircraft to the runway or for
maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Runway
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Figure 5-47 Depiction of Runway with a Loaded Flight plan
Sec 7
Symbols
Runway
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
A runway that is not in a loaded flight plan is shown as dark gray with no
other colors.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure 5-48 Depiction of Runway Not in Loaded Flight plan
Appendix A
A runway that is associated with an approach in the loaded flight plan is
outlined with a white rectangle, with the actual runway, in that rectangle.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-45
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Runway
5.5.3.6
Traffic
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate respective location as
determined by the related traffic systems. TIS, TAS and ADS-B traffic are all
displayed. Traffic is displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are
getting closer, and smaller when they are further away.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Figure 5-49 Depiction of Runway with Loaded Approach
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Traffic on PFD
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Traffic on MFD
Index
Figure 5-50 Traffic Depiction on PFD and MFD
5-46
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 1
System
Obstacle Alert
Foreword
5.5.3.7
Obstacles
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic display by two-dimensional tower
or windmill symbols found on the MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols
appear in the perspective view with relative height above terrain and distance
from the aircraft.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Obstacle
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Figure 5-51 Obstacle Depiction on PFD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Unlike the MFD moving map display, obstacles on the synthetic terrain
display do not change colors based on relative altitude but will be colored to
match any SVT TERRAIN or TAWS Alert from that obstacle. Obstacles greater
than 1000 feet below the aircraft’s altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown
behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-47
Field of View
The PFD Field of View can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page
lateral image. Two dashed lines forming a V-shape in front of the aircraft symbol
on the MFD with an angle of approximately 50º represent the forward horizontal
field of view shown on the PFD.
V-Shaped Lines
Depict PFD Field
of View (angle is
approx. 50°)
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.5.3.8
Figure 5-52 MFD and PFD Field of View Comparison
5-48
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
To configure the Field of View:
1. While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map Page Group, press the
MENU key to display the PAGE MENU.
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Figure 5-53 Page Menu
2. Press the ENT key to bring up the setup page.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Field of View
Appendix A
Figure 5-54 Map Setup Items
3. Turn the large MFD knob to scroll through the options to FIELD OF VIEW.
5. Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
5-49
Index
4. Turn the small MFD knob to select On or Off. Press the ENT key to confirm your
selection.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
5.5.3.9
Unusual Attitudes
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display,
pointing to the direction to fly to correct the unusual attitude condition. The
display shows either a brown or blue band of color at the top or bottom of the
screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the
horizon during extreme pitch attitudes.
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
• The terrain database is out of date using an older terrain database card.
Blue Band - Sky
Representation
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Two conditions that inhibit SVT and generate alerts on the PFD:
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Full
Display
Terrain
Index
Appendix A
Figure 5-55 Unusual Attitude Display - Blue Band
5-50
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
5-51
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Brown Band - Ground
Representation
Figure 5-56 Unusual Attitude Display - Brown Band
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
5-52
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
6.1
Alerts
• Alert is enabled and the
ADC is reporting that
altitude correction is
unavailable.
• ADC 1 or ADC 2 requires • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
service.
• ADC configuration error. • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
calibration version error.
service.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
AHRS(1/2) CAL
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
ADC(1/2)
SERVICE
ADC CONFIG
Action
Sec 5
Additional
Features
ADC(1/2) ALT EC • ADC 1 or ADC 2
Altitude Error Correction
is unavailable.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Description
Sec 3
MFD
Alert Message
Sec 2
PFD
The MFD ALERTS page may have two additional soft keys (TRND/ACK
and CAPTURE) which are present when interfaced to an optional ADAS+
Engine Trend Monitor (ETM). Pressing the TRND/ACK soft key is equivalent to
pressing the ETM Trend key for one second. Pressing the CAPTURE soft key is
equivalent to pressing the ETM Trend key for five seconds. Refer to the Airplane
Flight Manual and ADAS+ ETM documentation for the system description and
operating procedures.
Sec 1
System
Alerts are displayed on the MFD and are accessible via the ALERTS MFD
soft key. When a new advisory is present, the ALERTS soft key text changes to
ADVISORY and flashes until the alerts page is viewed.
Foreword
6
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
6-1
AHRS(1/2) GPS
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Action
• Verify that navigators are on
and have a GPS signal.
• Verify that self-test mode is
not enabled.
• Check the AFMS for
limitations.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2 is not
receiving backup GPS
information.
• Two GPS devices are
configured as present
and AHRS 1 is not
receiving GPS data from
the backup (2nd) device.
AHRS(1/2) SRVC • AHRS 1 or AHRS 2
magnetic-field model
requires update.
AHRS(1/2) TAS
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2 is not
receiving true airspeed
from the ADC.
• Upgrade AHRS magnetic field
model.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Displayed heading and
attitude data is still valid.
Appendix A
Index
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2 is
not receiving any GPS
information.
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2 is
using the backup GPS
source.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Description
• AHRS 1 or AHRS 2
is operating exclusively
in no-GPS reversionary
mode.
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
AHRS CONFIG
6-2
• Additional loss of GPS
data will cause loss of
heading and attitude
data.
• AHRS configuration error. • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Alert Message
Description
Action
AVTN DB
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Install the missing database.
• Reinsert the datacard, if
necessary.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Datacard may have been
ejected.
• Calibration data is lost. • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Datacard’s charts
• Reload charts database.
database is incomplete.
Some charts may be
unavailable.
• Chart streaming is not
available. GDU reverts to
the datacard’s charts.
• GDU 1-2 airframe
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
configuration settings
service.
disagree.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 7
Symbols
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 5
Additional
Features
CNFG
MISMATCH
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
CHT STREAM
Sec 3
MFD
CHT DB ERR
Sec 2
PFD
CAL LOST
• Reduced functionality
due to missing aviation
database.
Sec 1
System
• Reload MAG DB.
• AHRS/GDU magnetic field
model database version
mismatch.
ALT KEY INOP
• The ALT key function is
disabled. ALT key not
available.
ALT NO COMP • No data from one or
more altitude sensors.
ARINC 429
• ARINC 429 configuration
error.
CONFIG
ARINC 708
• ARINC 708 configuration
error.
CONFIG
AUD NOT AVAIL • Audio system is not
available.
AUD SYS FAIL
• Audio system failure.
Foreword
AHRS MAG DB
6-3
Foreword
Alert Message
CNFG MODULE
Sec 1
System
DATALINK
Description
Action
• GDU configuration
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
module is inoperative.
service.
• ADS-B fault: UAT receiver. • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• ADS-B fault: 1090
receiver.
Sec 2
PFD
• GDL 88 ADS-B Failure.
Unable to transmit ADS-B
messages.
Sec 3
MFD
• FIS-B weather has failed.
• GDL 88 ADS-B fault.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• GDL 88 ADS-B is not
transmitting position.
Check GPS devices.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• GDL 88 needs service.
• GDL 88 control panel
input fault. Check
transponder mode.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• GDL 88 ADS-B fault.
Pressure altitude source
inoperative.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
• GDL 88 external traffic
system inoperative or
connection is lost.
6-4
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Alert Message
• GDL 88 configuration
module needs service.
Action
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Foreword
DATALINK
(cont)
Description
Sec 1
System
• GDL 88 is inoperative
or connection to GDU is
lost.
• GDL 88 CSA failure.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
• Communication with
sensors is halted or lost.
Appendix A
ENG SENSOR
UNIT (1/2)
Sec 8
Glossary
DSCRT CONFIG
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 7
Symbols
DIAG MODE
• Remove database card or
move card to bottom slot.
• Restart GDU.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
DB SYNC
DISABLED
DB SYNC
ERROR
• Restart required to use
new databases.
• No database card found
to receive databases.
• Not enough space to
receive one or more
databases.
• System is in Diagnostic
mode.
• Discrete input/output
configuration error.
• Configuration error.
• Reconfigure all personal
settings.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
DB SYNC
COMPLETE
• Confirm the data is lost.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
DB ERR
Sec 3
MFD
DATA LOST
• GDL 88 external traffic
system in standby for
more than 60 seconds.
• Pilot stored data is lost.
All pilot configurable
items return to their
default settings.
• Database found on top
card.
• Database sync complete.
Sec 2
PFD
• GDL 88 external traffic
system has a low battery.
6-5
ESP FAIL
ETM CAPTURE
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
ETM FAULT
• ADAS+ engine
monitoring system is
recording trend data.
• Engine Trend Monitor
exceedance/advisory.
• ADAS+ engine
monitoring system is
reporting an exceedance
or advisory condition.
• Engine Trend Monitor
needs service.
• Unit may operate at
extreme temperatures
• Extended operation at
high temperatures is not
recommended as damage
to the GDU may occur.
Appendix A
Action
• Refer to the ADAS+ literature.
• Refer to the ADAS+ literature.
• Refer to the ADAS+ literature.
• ADAS+ engine
monitoring system is
reporting a system fault.
• Cooling fan no. 1 or no. 2 • Contact a Garmin dealer for
has failed.
service.
Sec 7
Symbols
FAN (1/2) FAIL
• Electronic Stability &
Protection (ESP) has
failed.
• Engine Trend Monitor
data capture.
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
ETM EXCEED
Description
• PFD/MFD coloration may
be incorrect.
Index
• Backlight may dim to
reduce power and heat.
6-6
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Alert Message
Action
• GAD 43 communication
is lost.
• Gyro Emulation Type
Mismatch fault.
• Yaw Rate Scale Factor
Mismatch fault.
• GDU AHRS Monitor fault.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
•
Sec 3
MFD
•
Sec 2
PFD
•
Sec 1
System
•
• Contact your Garmin dealer
for service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Pitch Deviation fault.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Roll Deviation fault.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Yaw Rate Deviation fault. • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
AHRS A429 Attitude
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
Timeout fault.
service.
Foreword
GAD 43
Description
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
6-7
GAD 43
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
Description
• AHRS A429 Attitude
Invalid fault.
• AHRS Pitch Out of Range
fault.
• AHRS Attitude Invalid
fault.
• AHRS A429 Heading
Timeout fault.
• AHRS A429 Heading
Invalid fault.
• Power Supply fault.
•
Sec 5
Additional
Features
•
•
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
•
GATE MODE
GDL69
•
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
AC reference is lost.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Application SCI integrity • Contact a Garmin dealer for
fault.
service.
Configuration integrity
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
fault.
service.
Calibration integrity fault. • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Unit fault.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
GAD 43e configuration
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
error.
service.
• Communication is halted.
• Automated testing is on.
• GDL 69 has failed.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
•
GAD 43E
CONFIG
Action
6-8
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Alert Message
• Operation in extreme
north latitudes has
rendered the heading
• Check the AFMS for
data unreliable.
limitations.
• Communication with GPS • Use an alternate navigation
1 or GPS 2 is lost.
source.
• Timing data from GPS 1
or GPS 2 is lost.
• GSR has failed.
GWX CONFIG
•
GWX SERVICE
•
•
HDG FAULT
•
Sec 2
PFD
GPS(1/2) PPS
FAIL
GSR FAIL
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
course information.
Sec 7
Symbols
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
• Heading data is
unreliable.
• HDG features are
disabled or defaulted to
GPS1 TRK.
Sec 3
MFD
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
GWX configuration error. • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Configuration is required.
GWX requires service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
AHRS1 or AHRS 2 in
• Check the AFMS for
no-magnetometer
limitations.
reversionary mode.
• Use a compass or other
• Heading fault occurs on
the AHRS.
HDG LOST
• Return to a geographic
position within the reliable
operating area, or use
an alternate means of
navigation.
Sec 1
System
GPS(1/2) FAIL
• AHRS 1 is too far north
or south. No magnetic
heading provided.
Action
Foreword
GEO LIMITS
Description
• GDU is in the
reversionary
track-based mode.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
6-9
HTAWS
Description
Action
• External HTAWS is
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
not available. Internal
service.
TERRAIN-HSVT alerting is
enabled.
• External HTAWS
configuration mismatch.
IAS NO COMP
• No data from one or
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
more airspeed sensors.
service.
<LRU> CAL
• Error in the calibration of • Calibration service required.
the indicated LRU.
Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
<LRU> CONFIG • Error in the configuration • Configuration is required.
of the indicated LRU.
Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
<LRU>
• The indicated LRU has
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
insufficient cooling.
service.
COOLING
Display is automatically
dimmed to reduce power
usage.
<LRU> DB ERR • Error exists with the
• Replace or update database.
indicated LRU database.
<LRU> KEYSTK • The indicated LRU key is • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
stuck.
<LRU> SERVICE • The indicated LRU
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
requires service.
service.
<LRU> VOLTAGE • The indicated LRU has
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
low voltage. Display is
service.
automatically dimmed to
reduce power usage.
MANIFEST
• LRU software mismatch. • Contact a Garmin dealer for
Communication is halted.
service.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
6-10
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Alert Message
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• Register with Connext
Satellite Services.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Appendix A
Index
Replace card.
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Replace card.
Sec 7
Symbols
190-00601-02 Rev. K
• Refer to the ADAS+ literature.
Sec 3
MFD
• ADAS+ engine trend
monitor is reporting a
previous exceedance.
RADAR
• Data does not match for
a duration of 15 seconds
CONTROLS
or longer.
DISAGREE
REGISTER GFDS • Data services are
inoperative. Connext
Satellite Services are not
registered.
ROL NO COMP • No data from one
or more roll attitude
sensors.
RS-232 CONFIG • RS-232 configuration
error.
RS-485 CONFIG • RS-485 configuration
error.
SD CARD 1
• Top SD Card disabled due
to errors.
SD CARD 2
• Bottom SD Card disabled
due to errors
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 2
PFD
PREV EXCEED
• No data from the
indicated navigation
receiver.
• No data is being sent to
the GDU.
• No data from one or
more pitch attitude
sensors.
• Previous Engine Trend
Monitor exceedance.
• Switch to alternate form
of navigation (GPS or
otherwise), if available.
Sec 1
System
NO RADAR
DATA
PIT NO COMP
• Communication with
NAV 1 or NAV 2 is lost.
Action
Foreword
NAV(1/2)
Description
6-11
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Alert Message
SIMULATOR
STORMSCOPE
Sec 2
PFD
SVT DISABLED
Description
• Simulator mode is
active. Do not use for
navigation.
• Stormscope has failed or
connection is lost.
• Outside of terrain
database coverage area.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
TAWS
TDB
TERRAIN DSP
• GDU software version
mismatch. No GDU
crossfill.
• External TAWS is not
available. Internal
TERRAIN-SVT alerting
enabled.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Repeat steps to reactivate
SVT with the appropriate PFD
soft keys.
• Install 9 arc-second database
(GDU 620 SW v6.21 or
earlier) or 4.9 arc second
database
(GDU 620 SW v7.00 or later).
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• External TAWS
configuration mismatch.
• Airframe does not
support Terrain database.
• Update database.
• Terrain or obstacle
database error in TAWS
B or
TERRAIN-SVT only.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
SW MISMATCH
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 3
MFD
• Terrain database
resolution is too low.
Action
6-12
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Alert Message
• ADS-B In traffic alerting
has failed.
Action
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
Sec 1
System
• ADS-B In traffic has
failed.
Sec 2
PFD
• TAS/TCAS has been in
standby for more than 60
seconds.
• TAS/TCAS is inoperative
or connection is lost.
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
6-13
Sec 7
Symbols
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 5
Additional
Features
TRAFFIC STDBY • Traffic is in Standby mode • Check traffic system controls
while airborne.
on the MFD Traffic Map page
or traffic system.
• Heading and track from
TRK LOST
active GPS is lost. HSI
is using secondary GPS
track.
USP
• Air data inputs to the
GMC 605 have failed.
Functions dependent
on air data may not be
supported and AFCS
performance may be
degraded.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Traffic device is
inoperative or connection
to GDU is lost.
• ADS-B traffic data does • Contact a Garmin dealer for
not match configuration.
service.
• Traffic device has failed. • Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Traffic data is no longer
displayed.
Sec 3
MFD
• TAS/TCAS has failed.
TRAFFIC
CONFIG
TRAFFIC FAIL
Foreword
TRAFFIC
Description
Foreword
Alert Message
WX ALERT
WX RDR
SERVICE
WXR INPUT
FAULT
XPDR (1/2)
• Possible severe weather
ahead.
• Communication with
weather radar is lost.
• Weather radar requires
service.
• Weather radar is not
receiving one or more
inputs.
• GTX1 or GTX 2 requires
service.
Action
• Check weather radar.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• Contact a Garmin dealer for
service.
• GTX 1 or GTX 2 is
inoperative or connection
to GDU is lost.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
WX RADAR
Description
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Table 6-1 Alert Messages
6-14
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
6.2
System Status
Foreword
Sec 1
System
The System Status page of Aux mode shows the status, serial number, and
software version of LRUs and the date of databases. There are no menu pages.
In the LRU Status column, a green check means the unit is present and
operating properly, while a red “X” indicates an absence or failure.
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Active Databases
Database Sync
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
System LRUs
Figure 6-1 System Status Displays
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
6-15
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
6-16
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
7
SYMBOLS
Map Page Symbols
Symbol
Sec 1
System
7.1
Foreword
The following tables describe the symbols that are found on the MFD Map
displays.
Description
Sec 2
PFD
Unknown Airport
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
Sec 3
MFD
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Towered, Serviced Airport
Soft Surface, Serviced Airport
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Soft Surface, Non-serviced Airport
Private Airport
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Heliport
Intersection
Sec 7
Symbols
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
NDB (Non-directional Radio Beacon)
VOR
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
VOR/DME
ILS/DME or DME-only
VORTAC
TACAN
VRP (Visual Reporting Point)
Index
User Waypoint
New User Airport
Table 7-1 Map Page Symbols
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
7-1
Foreword
7.2
SafeTaxi Symbols
Sec 1
System
Symbol
Description
Helipad
Sec 2
PFD
Airport Beacon
Sec 3
MFD
Under Construction Zones
Table 7-2 SafeTaxi Symbols
7.3
Traffic Symbols
Symbol
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Designated Water Areas
Description
(Highest to Lowest Priority)
Sec 7
Symbols
Traffic Advisory (TA), In Range
Traffic Advisory (TA), Out of Range
Sec 8
Glossary
Proximate Advisory (PA)
Appendix A
Other Traffic
Index
Table 7-3 Traffic Symbols
7-2
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Symbol
Foreword
Description
Basic Non-Directional Traffic
Basic Directional Traffic
Sec 1
System
Basic Off-scale Selected Traffic
Proximate Non-Directional Traffic
Sec 2
PFD
Proximate Directional Traffic
Sec 3
MFD
Proximate Off-scale Selected Traffic
Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Directional Alerted Traffic
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Off-Scale Directional Alerted Traffic
Non-Directional Surface Vehicle
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Directional Surface Vehicle
NOTE: Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on airborne/on-ground
status of target (target is brown when on the ground, see the surface vehicles).
Sec 7
Symbols
Table 7-4 ADS-B Traffic Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
7-3
Foreword
7.4
Basemap Symbols
Symbol
Description
Sec 1
System
Interstate Highway
State Highway
Sec 2
PFD
US Highway
Sec 3
MFD
National Highway - 2-digit drawn inside
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Small City or Town
Medium City
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Large City
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Table 7-5 Basemap Symbols
7-4
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
7.5
Map Tool Bar Symbols
Foreword
Symbol
Description
Terrain Proximity Enabled and Available Indicator
Sec 1
System
Terrain Proximity Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Sec 2
PFD
Point Obstacle Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
Point Obstacle Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
Wire Obstacles Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
Wire Obstacles Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later)
StormScope
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
StormScope Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Traffic Enabled and Available Indicator
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Traffic Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Table 7-6 Map Tool Bar Symbols
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
7-5
Foreword
7.6
Ownship Symbols
Symbol
Description
Sec 1
System
Generic Airplane
Low-Wing Prop
Sec 2
PFD
High-Wing Prop
Kit Plane
Sec 3
MFD
Turboprop
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Twin-Engine Prop
Single-Engine Jet
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Business Jet
Simple Airplane
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
2-Blade Rotorcraft
Sec 7
Symbols
3-Blade Rotorcraft
4-Blade Rotorcraft
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 7-7 Ownship Symbols
7-6
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
7.7
Miscellaneous Symbols
Foreword
Symbol
Description
Arrow
Sec 1
System
Default Map Cursor
Measuring Cursor
Sec 2
PFD
MFD Wind Vector (w/ valid GPS solution)
Sec 3
MFD
PFD Wind Vector styles
Parallel Track Waypoint
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Restricted/Prohibited/Warning/Alert
TFR (Temporary Flight Restrictions)
Sec 5
Additional
Features
MOA
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Class B Airspace
Class C Airspace
Class D Airspace
Sec 8
Glossary
Table 7-8 Miscellaneous Symbols
Sec 7
Symbols
Airspace Altitude Label (Upper/Lower Limits)
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
7-7
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
7-8
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
8
GLOSSARY
Foreword
active, activate
Air Data Computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast
Automatic Flight Following
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
altitude
autopilot
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
airspeed
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing System
BARO
BC
Bearing
barometric setting
backcourse
The compass direction from the present position to a
destination waypoint
bearing
center runway
degrees Celsius
Course Deviation Indicator
channel
cloud
clear
configuration
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Appendix A
Index
8-1
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 3
MFD
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 2
PFD
BRG
C
ºC
CDI
CHNL
CLD
CLR
CONFIG
Sec 1
System
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
ADS-B
AFF
AFM
AFMS
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
ALT
AP
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
AS
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
AUX
AWOS
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
Course
Crosstrack Error
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTRL
CUM
D ALT
DB, DBASE
DCLTR, DECLTR
deg
DEP
Desired Track (DTK)
DEST
DFLT
DIS
Distance
DME
DP
DPRT
DSBL
DTK
EDR
ELEV
EMI
ENR
En Route Safe Altitude
ENT
ERR
ESA
ETA
ETE
8-2
The line between two points to be followed by the
aircraft
The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either
direction, left or right
course
cursor
Control Area
control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
density altitude
database
declutter
degree
departure
The desired course between the active “from” and
“to” waypoints
destination
default
distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the present position to
a destination waypoint
Distance Measuring Equipment
Departure Procedure
departure
disabled
Desired Track
Excessive Descent Rate
elevation
Electromagnetic Interference
en route
The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles
left or right of the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to
enter
error
En route Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time En Route
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
degrees Fahrenheit
Federal Aviation Administration
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
flight director
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
flight plan
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
G/S, GS
GCSS
GDC
GDL
GDU
GEO
GLS
GMA
GMT
GMU
GPS
GPSS
Ground Speed
glideslope
Garmin Connext Satellite Service
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Display Unit
geographic
Global Navigation Satellite Landing System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Global Positioning System
GPS Roll Steering
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a
ground position
see Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed
Garmin Transponder
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
8-3
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 5
Additional
Features
heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon
indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro
Horizontal Figure of Merit
mercury
hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 3
MFD
HFOM
Hg
hPa
HPL
Sec 2
PFD
HDG
Heading
Sec 1
System
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GTX
Foreword
ºF
FAA
FCC
FCST
FD
FIS-B
FISDL
FLTA
FPL
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
HSDB
HSI
Hz
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Hertz
IAF
ICAO
IFR
IGRF
ILS
IMC
IOI
INFO
in HG
INT
INTEG
ITI
Initial Approach Fix
International Civil Aviation Organization
Instrument Flight Rules
International Geomagnetic Reference Field
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Imminent Obstacle Impact
information
inches of mercury
intersection(s)
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Imminent Terrain Impact
L
LAT
LCD
LCL
LED
Leg
LIFR
LNAV
LOC
LOI
LON
LPV
LRU
LT
LTNG
left, left runway
latitude
Liquid Crystal Display
local
Light Emitting Diode
The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints
Low Instrument Flight Rules
Lateral Navigation
localizer
loss of integrity (GPS)
longitude
Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance
Line Replacement Unit
left
lightning
MAG
MAG VAR
MapMX
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
A proprietary data format used to forward navigation
information from the Garmin GPS units to the GDU
620
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric minimum descent altitude
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
8-4
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
PA
PC
PDA
PFD
P. POS
PTK
Proximity Advisory
personal computer
Premature Descent Alert
Primary Flight Display
Present Position
parallel track
QTY
quantity
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
OAT
OBS
Sec 3
MFD
navigation
NAVigation AID
Negative Climb Rate
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Sec 2
PFD
NAV
NAVAID
NCR
NDB
NEXRAD
Sec 1
System
MKR
MOA
MOV
mpm
MSA
MSG
MSL
MT
mV
MVFR
Aviation Routine Weather Report
Multi Function Display
minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within
ten miles of the aircraft present position
marker beacon
Military Operations Area
movement
meters per minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
message
Mean Sea Level
meter
millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
Foreword
METAR
MFD
MIN
Minimum Safe Altitude
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
8-5
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
R
RAIM
RAM
REF
REQ
REV
RMI
RNG
RNWY
ROC
RT
RTC
right, right runway
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
random access memory
reference
required
reverse, revision, revise
Radio Magnetic Indicator
range
runway
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
right
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SFC
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SRVC, SVC
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
SUA
SUSP
SVT
SW
SYS
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
surface
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
slip/skid
symbol
speed
service
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Special Use Airspace
suspend
Synthetic Vision
software
system
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
TAT
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
8-6
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Appendix A
Index
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 7
Symbols
Wide Area Augmentation System
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
weather
transponder
cross-track
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
WAAS
WGS-84
WPT
WX
XPDR
XTK
Sec 5
Additional
Features
VS
VSI
velocity (airspeed)
variation
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Visual Meteorological Conditions
vertical navigation
VHF Omni-directional Range
very high frequency omnidirectional range station and
tactical air navigation
Vertical speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
V, Vspeed
VAR
VFR
VHF
VLOC
VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOR
VORTAC
Sec 3
MFD
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal Polar
Stereographic Grid
Sec 2
PFD
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Sec 1
System
TRK
TRSA
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
temperature
terminal
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Terminal Maneuvering Area
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground
position; also ‘Ground Track’
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Foreword
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEMP
TERM
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TMA
Topo
Track
8-7
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
8-8
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
APPENDIX A
Foreword
A1
SD Card Use and Databases
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
2. To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Inserting an SD Card
1. Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with
the face of the display bezel).
Sec 5
Additional
Features
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A.1 for instructions on updating the aviation
database.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Ensure the GDU 620 is powered off before inserting or removing
an SD card.
Sec 3
MFD
The unit will generate an error in the event that a database SD card is inserted
into the top slot. Aviation databases can be loaded from an SD card in either slot.
If the aviation database on the SD card is more than two cycles expired, and the
pilot declines the system’s prompt to update the aviation database, the system
will provide a second prompt that allows the pilot to suppress future prompts to
update to that particular aviation database on that SD card.
Sec 2
PFD
SD cards are required for Terrain, Obstacle, FliteChart, SafeTaxi, ChartView,
and Aviation database storage as well as Aviation, Jeppesen aviation and
ChartView database updates. For database updates, the database update datacard
must be inserted in the top SD card slot while the appropriate database card is
located in the bottom SD card slot. ChartView is an optional feature that requires
enablement by a Garmin dealer.
Sec 1
System
The G500/G600 System uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store
various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards are required for
database storage as well as database updates.
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
A-1
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Aviation
Function
Airport, NAVAID,
Waypoint, and
Airspace information
Where
Stored
Update
Cycle
Provider
Notes
Internal
28 days (on
GDU 620 Thursdays)
memory or
SD card
fly.garmin.com Updates installed via
SD card and copied
into internal memory
IGRF model AHRS magnetic
variation model
Internal
AHRS
memory
5 years
fly.garmin.com Included with
Aviation database
SafeTaxi
Airport surface
diagrams
SD card
56 days (on
Thursdays)
fly.garmin.com
Terrain
Topographic map,
SVT, Terrain/TAWS
SD card
As required
fly.garmin.com 9 arc-second or
higher resolution
required for SVT
Obstacle
Obstacle information
for map, SVT, and
TAWS
SD card
56 days (on
Thursdays)
fly.garmin.com
Basemap
Boundary and road
information
Internal
As required
Memory or
SD card
fly.garmin.com
Airport
Directory
Airport facility and
FBO information
SD card
56 days
fly.garmin.com Database may be
available in different
versions. Update
cycle and content
may vary.
FliteCharts
FAA-published
terminal procedures
SD card
28 days (on
Thursdays)
fly.garmin.com Disables 180 days
after expiration date.
ChartView
Jeppesen terminal
procedures
SD card
14 days (on
Fridays)
jeppesen.com
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Database
Name
Optional feature
that requires Garmin
dealer enablement.
Disables 70 days
after expiration date.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Table A-1 Database List
A-2
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
A.1.1
Aviation Databases
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
3. Verify the correct update cycle is loaded during power-up. Press the ENT key to
continue or the CLR key to cancel loading.
Sec 3
MFD
2. Turn the G500/G600 System ON.
Sec 2
PFD
Updating the Aviation Database
1. With the G500/G600 System OFF, insert the SD card containing the aviation
database update into the either card slot of the GDU 620 to be updated (label
of SD card should face up).
Sec 1
System
The optional ChartView database is updated on a 14 day cycle. The
ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. ChartView is an
optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer. Contact Jeppesen
(www.jeppesen.com) for ChartView subscription and update information.
Foreword
The aviation database is updated on a 28 day cycle. Aviation database updates
are provided by Garmin and may be downloaded from the Garmin website
fly.garmin.com onto a Garmin provided Supplemental datacard. Contact Garmin
at fly.garmin.com for aviation database updates and update kits. The Aviation
database is stored on an SD card. This datacard is used to transfer the database
from the top SD card slot to the datacard located in the bottom SD card slot.
Removal of the datacard in the bottom SD card slot is not required.
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure A-1 Database Initialization Display
Appendix A
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
A-3
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
4. A notice on the display will indicate successful updating of the database.
5. The following display will show the databases and their current status.
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Figure A-2 Database Loading Completed
Figure A-3 Start-up Screen Database Information
6. Use the large MFD knob to select the AUX page group and then small MFD
knob to reach the System Status Page.
7. Press the DBASE soft key to place the cursor in the “DATABASE” window.
8. Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases
are current and there are no errors. If a database is highlighted in yellow, it is
either expired or the G500/G600 can not determine the date.
9. Power down the GDU 620.
A-4
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
A.1.2
Garmin Databases
Appendix A
Index
A-5
Sec 8
Glossary
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 7
Symbols
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
• FliteCharts – The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the
United States only. This database is updated on a 28-day cycle. If not updated
within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts no longer functions.
Sec 5
Additional
Features
• SafeTaxi – The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for
selected airports. These diagrams aid in following ground control instructions
by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to
taxiways, ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated
on a 56-day cycle. SafeTaxi will still be shown after it has expired.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
• Obstacle – The obstacles database contains data for obstacles, such as
towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft. Obstacles 200 feet and
higher are included in the obstacle database. The rotorcraft database
includes all reported obstacles regardless of height. It is very important to
note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not
be contained in the obstacle database. This database is updated on a 56day cycle. Obstacles will still be shown after the database has expired.
Several obstacle database options are available. Obstacle databases created
for GTN software version 5.10 or later include all power lines or only HOT
lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed. Hazardous
Obstacle Transmission (HOT) Lines are power lines that are co-located
with other FAA-identified obstacles. The installed obstacle database type
can be verified on the System Status page. Power line data is available for
the contiguous United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico.
Sec 3
MFD
• Terrain – The terrain database contains terrain mapping data. This database
is updated periodically and has no expiration date.
Sec 2
PFD
• Aviation – The aviation database contains airport, airspace, NAVAID, and
waypoint information. This database is updated on a 28 day cycle.
Sec 1
System
The following GDU 620 databases are stored on Supplemental datacards
provided by Garmin:
Foreword
WARNING: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases
comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and crossvalidates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness
of the data.
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Since these databases are not stored internally in the GDU 620, a
Supplemental Data Card containing identical database versions must be kept in
each display unit for dual installations. After subscribing to the desired database
product, the database product will need to be downloaded to a Supplemental
Data Card. Insert the Supplemental Data Card into the lower card slot shown in
Figure A-4. The Supplemental Data Card should not be removed except to
update the databases stored on the card. The upper slot is typically used for
updating the navigation database and is then normally left open. The Navigation
card may be inserted in either slot, but should use the same slot each time.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
• Airport Directory (optional) – The airport directory database contains
airport facility and FBO information. This database is optional and “N/A”
will be displayed in white text on the startup screen if the database is not
installed. This database may be available in multiple versions with varying
update cycles and/or content.
Navigation Database SD Update Card
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Navigation, Terrain, Obstacles, Airports,
SafeTaxi, Charts (FliteChart or ChartView)
Database SD Card
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Figure A-4 SD Card Database Location
The Garmin databases can be updated by following the instructions detailed
in the “Navigation Databases” section of the Garmin web site (fly.garmin.com).
Once the updated files have been downloaded from the web site, a PC equipped
with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards. The following equipment
is required to perform the update:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000, XP, Vista, or Windows
7 recommended)
• SanDisk SD Card Reader, P/Ns SDDR-93 or SDDR-99 or equivalent card
reader
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin web site
Index
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Card (P/N 010-00769-xx)
It may be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized
service facility in order to use certain database features.
A-6
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Updating Garmin Databases
1. Download the data to the data cards from the appropriate web site.
2. Insert the Database SD card in an empty card slot of the GDU 620. The SD card
containing the Aviation, ChartView, FliteCharts, SafeTaxi, or any other database
must be inserted into the lower slot on the GDU 620.
3. Apply power to the G500/G600 System. View the MFD start-up screen. Check
that the databases are initialized and displayed. When updating the terrain and
FliteCharts databases, an “in progress” message may be seen. If this message
is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding. Some
databases can take up to 15 minutes to update.
4. Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT key or the
right-most soft key. If a database is highlighted in yellow, it is either expired or
the G500/G600 can not determine the date.
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
A-7
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Appendix A
5. Use the large MFD knob to select the AUX page group and then the small
MFD knob to reach the System Status Page.
6. Press the DBASE soft key to place the cursor in the “DATABASE” window.
7. Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases
are current and there are no errors.
8. Power down the GDU 620.
Sec 8
Glossary
Figure A-5 Start-up Screen Database Information
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
This page intentionally left blank
A-8
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 1
System
Foreword
INDEX
1-2 key 2-3
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
B
Appendix A
Backcourse 2-24, 2-25
Backlighting 1-22
Baro-corrected altitude 4-4
Barometric minimum 2-15
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Index
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 2
PFD
Above Ground Level 4-11
ACT 4-110
Activating XM 5-22
Active flight plan 2-15, 3-1, 3-67, 3-68,
3-69
Additional features 5-1
ADF 1-1, 1-2, 2-2, 2-4, 2-28, 8-1
ADIZ 3-6, 3-11, 3-27
ADS-B 4-47
AFF 3-58
Age 4-55
AHRS iii, 1-1, 1-5, 1-6, 1-12, 3-37, 6-2,
6-7, 6-9
Aircraft symbol 2-9, 2-19, 3-3
Air Data Computer 1-1, 1-5
AIREP 4-128, 4-145
AIRMETs 4-56, 4-70, 4-126, 4-142, 4-151
Airport beacon 7-2
Airport diagram 5-3, 5-4, A-5
Airport Directory 3-75, A-6
Airport signs 2-5, 5-42
Airspace labels 3-29
Airspeed Indicator 1-21, 2-5–2-6
Airspeed reference 1-21, 2-8, 3-33
Airspeed tape 2-6, 2-7, 2-18, 3-33
Airspeed trend vector 2-6
Air temperature 1-5, 1-8, 2-1
Airways 3-2, 3-6, 3-11, 3-28
Alerts 2-14, 2-15, 3-69, 4-16, 4-17, 4-19,
4-24, 4-29, 4-40, 4-43, 6-1
Altimeter ii, 2-13, 2-15, 4-4
Altitude 1-1, 1-5, 1-16, 1-21, 2-11, 2-14,
2-15, 3-17, 3-31, 3-37, 3-39, 3-69
Altitude alerter 2-14, 5-15
Altitude alerting 2-14
Altitude Bug 1-16, 2-1, 2-13
Altitude capture 5-32
Sec 1
System
A
Foreword
Symbols
Altitude Display Mode 4-32, 4-33
Altitude minimums 3-69, 5-15
Altitude select 1-16
Altitude trend vector 2-13
Angle of incidence 4-94
Annunciations 1-12, 2-14, 2-15, 2-30,
4-10, 4-16, 4-17, 4-24, 4-29,
4-35, 4-36, 4-44, 4-46, 5-6, 6-1
Answering a phone call 3-66
Antenna 4-136
Antenna stabilization 4-108
Antenna tilt 4-91, 4-92, 4-96, 4-104,
4-108, 4-112
Approaches 2-24, 2-25, 4-20, 5-3, 5-4,
5-9, 5-13, 5-43, 8-1
Apt Dir 3-75
AP Test 2-3
APTSIGNS 2-5
Arc 4-6, 4-8, 4-13, 4-27
Arrivals 5-3, 5-4
Attitude 1-1, 1-5, 1-6, 1-12, 2-9, 2-11,
5-31, 6-7, 8-1
Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS) 1-5, 1-6, 1-12, 6-2
Attitude Indicator 2-9–2-10
Aural message 4-11, 4-15, 4-16, 4-18,
4-22, 4-23, 4-24, 4-30
Automatic flight following 3-58
Autopilot 1-1, 2-3, 5-31
Autopilot disconnect 5-31
Auto-slewing 2-25
Auto zoom 3-11, 3-12
Aux mode 3-31
AUX - System Status Page 5-21
Aviation map data 3-25
B-1
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Barometric pressure 1-18, 1-22, 2-15,
3-40
Basemap symbols 7-5
Beacon 7-1, 7-2
Bearing information 2-27–2-28
Bearing line 2-28, 4-104, 4-107, 4-108
Bearing Pointers 2-23, 2-27
Best glide 2-8, 3-33
Bezel keys 1-16, 1-18
Blind Alley 4-99
BRG 1-2 2-4
Brightness 1-21, 1-22, 3-31, 3-32
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
C
Calibrated gain 4-106
Call suppression 3-60
Canadian Nexrad 4-64
Cautions iv, 3-6, 3-40, 4-13, 4-17, 4-30,
4-101, 4-102, 4-112, 5-31
CDI 1-16, 1-21, 2-2, 2-3, 2-19, 2-20,
2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-25, 3-31,
3-36, 3-37, 3-67
CDI source 2-22, 2-25, 2-28
Cell movement 3-21, 3-22, 4-56, 4-82
Channel 1-10, 3-42, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27,
5-29
Chart category 3-71, 5-8
Charts 3-77, 5-1, 5-2, 5-4, 5-17
ChartView 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, A-1, A-3, A-7
ChartView database 5-3, 5-4, A-1, A-3
ChartView subscription A-3
Check attitude 5-31
City 3-6, 3-70, 3-73, 4-56, 4-94
City forecast 4-56, 4-77, 4-78
Class B airspace 3-6, 3-26, 7-7
Class C airspace 3-6, 3-26, 7-7
Class D airspace 3-6, 3-27, 7-7
Cloud tops 4-56, 4-67, 4-68
Cloudy 4-57
Cold front 4-77
Color scheme 5-17
Combined NEXRAD 4-142
Compass card 2-19, 2-21
Continental US NEXRAD 4-140
B-2
CONUS 4-140
County warnings 4-56, 4-79
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) 2-19,
2-20, 2-21–2-22
Course pointer 2-19, 2-20, 2-21, 2-25
Course select 1-16, 2-1, 2-23
Crossfill 1-21, 3-36
Cross track error 2-22
Current heading 1-16, 2-19, 2-20, 2-21,
2-24
Current track indicator 2-19, 2-21
Cursor 1-18, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-21,
3-32, 3-34, 3-35, 3-36, 3-73,
3-75, 7-7
Customizing maps 3-10
Customizing Nav Map pages 3-10
Cycle number 5-4, 5-21
Cyclone 4-54, 4-56, 4-85
D
Database 1-5, 1-14, 3-11, 3-43, 4-9,
4-24, 4-73, 4-77, 4-130, 4-147,
5-3, 5-4, 5-21, 6-10, 6-14, A-1,
A-5
Databases A-1
Database SYNC 3-44
Data fields 3-68, 3-69
Data link 1-2, 1-10, 4-38, 4-52, 4-55,
4-59, 4-62, 4-66, 4-68, 4-69, 4-71,
4-73, 4-75, 4-76, 4-78, 4-79,
4-82, 4-86, 4-112, 4-121, 4-127,
4-131, 4-133, 4-138, 4-151
Data Link Receiver troubleshooting 5-30
Date 1-21, 3-31, 3-38, 5-4, 5-21, 6-14,
A-5
Day view 5-17
DCLTR soft key 3-5, 5-18, 5-19
Decision Height (DH) 3-67
Declutter 2-11, 3-5, 3-6, 4-31, 5-19
Departures 4-20, 5-3, 5-4
Display brightness 1-21, 1-22, 3-31, 3-32
Display units 1-22, 2-34, 3-31, 3-39, 3-40
Distance 1-21, 3-7, 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13,
3-39, 3-67, 3-70
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
H
Index
B-3
Appendix A
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
Hail 4-61, 4-93, 4-98, 4-100
Hazard avoidance 4-1
Haze 4-57
Heading 1-6, 1-16, 2-19, 2-20, 3-1, 3-37,
4-13, 4-32, 4-38, 5-32
Heading bug 1-16, 2-1, 2-19, 2-20
Heading select 1-16
Helipad 7-2
Heliport 7-1
Home page 3-3
Horizon heading 2-5, 5-37, 5-39, 5-42
Horizon line 2-9
Horizontal scan 4-89, 4-101, 4-104,
4-107, 4-108, 4-109
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) 1-4,
1-16, 2-1, 2-19–2-34, 5-42
Hot spots 5-18, 5-19
Sec 7
Symbols
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
GAD 43 1-1, 1-2, 2-3, 5-31, 6-6
GCSS 4-115
GDC 74A ii, 1-1, 1-5, 1-8
Sec 5
Additional
Features
G
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Facility 3-70, 3-72, 3-73
Fast/Slow indication 2-34
Field of view 3-11, 3-19
Five-hundred aural alert 4-18, 4-22
Flight director 5-34
Flight path marker 5-37, 5-41
Flight phase 4-20
Flight plan 1-21, 2-15, 2-24, 3-1, 3-2,
3-12, 3-67, 5-8
FliteCharts 5-3, 5-4, A-5, A-7
FliteCharts database 5-4, A-7
Flood 4-57, 4-79
Fog 4-57, 4-93
Forecast time 4-78
Forward looking terrain avoidance 4-20,
4-26, 4-28
Freezing level 4-56, 4-86, 4-104
Frequency 2-20, 2-24, 2-25, 2-26, 2-27,
3-72, 3-74
Sec 3
MFD
F
Sec 2
PFD
Echo tops 4-56, 4-61, 4-65, 4-66, 4-67
ETA 3-67
Excessive descent rate alert 4-18, 4-19
Expiration time 4-52, 4-55, 4-151
Exposure level 4-95
External TAWS 4-25
Extreme attitude 2-11
Extreme Pitch 2-11, 5-45
Extreme Roll 2-12
Sec 1
System
E
GDL 69/69A 1-2, 1-10, 3-21, 3-41, 3-42,
4-1, 5-1, 5-22, 5-24, 5-25, 5-30
GDL 69 troubleshooting 5-30
GDL 88 models 1-9
GDU 620 1-1, 1-4
GDU 1040 1-1
GFDS 4-115, see also GCSS
Glideslope 2-22, 2-24
Glossary 8-1
GMU 44 1-1, 1-2, 1-8
GPS altitude ii, 4-4
GPS level of service 2-19, 2-21, 2-28
GPSS 5-34
Ground Clutter Suppression 4-110
Ground mapping 4-111, 4-112
Ground pointer 2-1, 2-10
Ground Radar 4-112
Ground return 4-94, 4-96, 4-112
Ground speed 2-5, 2-6, 2-11, 4-24, 5-41
GRS 77 1-1, 1-5, 1-14, 5-31
GSR 56 1-9, 3-56, 3-59
GTP 59 1-2
GTX 33 1-11, 4-1
GTX 330/330D 1-11
GWX 68 4-89
Foreword
Distance measuring 3-9
DME 2-30, 7-1
Don’t sink 4-18, 4-23
DP 5-3, 5-4
Dual installation 2-16, 3-36, 3-70, 5-15,
A-6
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
I
J
L
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Icing 4-70, 4-87, 4-126, 4-127, 4-142,
4-144
Identifier 3-70, 3-71, 3-73, 5-8, 5-9, 5-42
IFR 4-70, 4-127, 4-144
IGRF model 1-5, 1-14
ILS 2-22, 2-24, 2-25, 2-26, 7-1
Imminent obstacle impact 4-20, 4-26
Imminent terrain impact 4-20, 4-26
INFO soft key 3-68
Infra-Red 4-124
Inhibit alerting 4-28
Intersection 3-6, 3-25, 3-26, 5-19, 7-1
Iridium 1-9, 3-56, 3-59, 4-1, 4-112
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 3
MFD
Hrzn Hdg 2-5
Hurricanes 4-136
Jeppesen 5-3, A-1, A-3
Jeppesen database A-3, A-7
Land data 3-2, 3-11, 3-13, 3-15
Lateral deviation scale 2-19, 2-21
Lat/Lon 3-6, 3-11, 3-18, 3-70
LDA 2-25
Legend 3-11, 3-22, 4-5, 4-16, 4-53, 4-54,
4-58, 4-60, 4-63, 4-67, 4-75,
4-123, 4-132, 4-139, 4-149
Level 1-21, 3-5, 3-6, 3-31, 3-32, 4-17,
4-20, 4-86, 4-98
Lighting 1-22, 3-74
Lightning 3-2, 3-6, 3-21, 3-22, 4-54,
4-56, 4-69, 4-73, 4-116, 4-125,
4-130, 4-147
Limitations 4-9, 4-10, 4-41, 4-61, 4-136
Localizer 2-20, 2-22, 2-25, 2-27
Loc BC 2-25
LPV 2-28
LRU 1-1, 1-3, 1-9, 3-43, 5-30, 6-14
Lubber line 2-19, 2-21
M
B-4
Magnetometer 1-2, 1-6, 1-8
Making a phone call 3-65
Map 3-2
Map orientation 3-1, 3-3, 3-12, 3-70, 4-5,
4-13, 4-54, 4-62, 4-116, 4-121,
4-138
Map panning 3-7
Map pointer 3-2, 3-7
Map range 1-21, 3-2, 3-5, 3-12, 4-13,
5-18
Map setup 3-10, 4-28
Map symbols 7-1, 7-5
Map toolbar symbols 7-6
Marker beacon 2-30
Markings 2-7, 5-18, 5-19
Measuring distance 3-9
Menu Key 1-18, 1-19, 3-4, 3-10
Menus 1-18, 1-19
Message 2-19, 4-18, 4-24, 4-30
METARs 3-67, 3-76, 4-54, 4-56, 4-73,
4-116, 4-130, 4-131, 4-147,
4-151
MFD 1-1, 1-4, 1-15, 1-18, 3-1
MFD display units 3-31, 3-39
Military 3-11, 3-27, 4-62
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) 2-15
Minimums 5-15
Miscellaneous symbols 7-7
Miscompare 2-31
MOA 3-6, 3-11, 3-27, 7-7
Motion vector 4-50
Mountains 4-136
Moving map 1-1, 1-4, 1-18, 3-1, 3-2,
3-11
MPEL 4-95
MSL 4-4
Mute 5-28
N
National Weather Service 4-59, 4-70,
4-79, 4-126, 4-142
Nav angle 1-22, 2-20, 3-40
Navigation database 1-5, 1-14, A-3, A-6
Navigation map 1-13, 1-18, 3-1, 3-2,
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
R
Index
B-5
Appendix A
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 8
Glossary
Radar 4-41, 4-43, 4-59, 4-61, 4-65, 4-89,
4-136, 4-137
Radar altimeter 2-13, 2-17, 2-32, 3-32
Radar gain 4-105
Rainy 4-57
Range keys 1-18, 3-5, 3-70, 5-11
Range ring 3-2, 3-11, 3-13, 4-5, 4-13,
4-32, 4-33, 4-48, 4-109
RECENT 5-8
Record of Revisions vi
Reduced required obstacle clearance 4-20
Reduced required terrain clearance 4-20
Reference speed 2-8
Reflectivity 4-60, 4-61, 4-93, 4-100,
4-137
Sec 7
Symbols
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Page group 1-18, 3-2
Page menus 1-18, 1-19, 1-20, 3-10, 3-11,
3-21, 3-24, 3-25, 3-32, 3-68, 4-6,
4-14, 4-27, 4-53, 4-54
Panning 3-7, 5-12, 5-19
Sec 3
MFD
P
Sec 2
PFD
OAT 1-5, 1-8
OBS 1-16, 2-19, 2-23, 2-28, 3-37, 8-5
Obstacle data 3-17, 4-4, 4-24, A-5
Obstacles 3-13, 3-15, 3-17, 4-4, 4-9,
4-10, 4-11, 4-43, 5-44, 7-4, A-5
Obstructions 4-9, 4-10
Occluded front 4-78
Operating distance 4-95
Other airspace 3-27
Outside air temperature 1-5, 1-8, 2-1
Overspeed 2-6
Overview 1-1
Sec 1
System
O
Parallel track 7-7
Part Sun 4-57
PFD 1-4, 1-15
PFD display units 2-34
PFD options 1-21, 3-31, 3-34, 3-35
PFD soft keys 2-2
Phone book 3-61
Phone call 3-65
Phone volume 3-64
Photocell 1-22
Pilot Controlled Lighting 3-74
PIREP 4-72, 4-128, 4-145
Pitch indication 2-9, 2-11
Pitch scale 2-9, 5-40
Position reporting 3-56
Power 4-137
Power-up 1-5, 1-12, 1-14, 4-11, 4-24,
4-44, 5-4, 5-21, A-3, A-7
Precipitation 4-61, 4-65, 4-73, 4-90,
4-92, 4-93, 4-101, 4-108, 4-122,
4-130, 4-147
Precipitation intensity levels 4-98, 4-105
Premature descent alerting 4-20
Preset 5-29
Product age 4-52, 4-55
Proximate advisory 7-2
Proximity advisory 4-32
Foreword
3-10, 4-5, 4-28, 4-52, 5-18, 5-19
Navigation source iii, 2-3, 2-19, 2-22–224, 2-27, 2-28, 3-37, 3-67
Nav range ring 3-2, 3-11, 3-13
Nav Status Bar 2-1
Nav status style 2-1, 3-31, 3-35
NDB 3-6, 3-11, 3-25, 3-26, 5-19, 7-1
Negative climb rate 4-18, 4-23
NEXRAD 3-21, 4-56, 4-59, 4-137, 4-138,
4-151
Legend 4-63, 4-139
Limitations 4-61
Viewing range 4-63, 4-138
NEXRAD Legend 3-22
Nexrad source 4-64
NEXRAD Viewing Range 3-22
Night view 5-17
Normal display operation 1-1
North up 3-1, 3-11, 3-12, 4-52, 4-54,
4-116
NOTAM 5-3, 5-16
Notes v
NRST 5-8
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Regional NEXRAD 4-141
Register with GFDS 4-113
Restore defaults 3-32, 3-69
Restricted airspace 3-27
Roll pointer 2-9
Roll Scale 2-9, 2-10
Roll scale pointer 2-1, 2-10
Roll Scale Zero 2-9
Route 3-8, 3-67, 5-19
Runway depiction 5-43
Runway extension 3-25, 3-26
Runway information 3-72, 3-74
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Sec 3
MFD
S
SafeTaxi 3-12, 3-25, 5-1, 5-18, 5-19,
5-21, A-1, A-5, A-7
SafeTaxi symbols 7-2
Satellite telephone 3-59
Scale 2-6, 2-8, 2-9, 2-10, 2-13, 2-19,
2-20, 2-21, 3-2, 3-5, 3-7, 3-11,
3-15, 4-3, 4-34, 4-111, 5-40
Scroll bars 5-12
SDF 2-25
Sector scan 4-89, 4-107
Secure Digital (SD) card 2-1, 3-1, A-1
Selected Altitude 2-11, 2-13, 2-14, 2-15,
3-37, 4-132, 4-149
Selected altitude range arc 3-20
Selected Course 2-23, 3-37
Selected Heading 2-20, 3-37
Serial numbers 3-43, 5-30, 6-14
Service Class 5-23, 5-24
SIGMET 4-56, 4-70, 4-71, 4-126, 4-127,
4-142, 4-143, 4-151
Sky pointer 2-10
Sky representation 2-9, 5-45, 5-46
Slewing 2-25
Slip/Skid Indicator 2-1, 2-9
Smart airspace 3-28
Snow 4-57, 4-61, 4-93
Soft keys 1-15, 1-19, 2-1, 2-2, 2-11, 3-1,
4-31, 4-44, 5-26, 5-39, 5-41
Software version 3-43, 5-30, 6-14
Speed 1-5, 1-21, 2-5, 2-8, 2-11, 2-18,
B-6
3-13, 3-31, 3-33, 3-39, 4-20, 4-40
Speed range 2-7
STAB 4-108
Stabilization 4-101, 4-108
STAR 5-3, 5-4
Stationary front 4-78
Stormscope 1-9, 4-152
Sunny 4-57
Surface analysis 4-56, 4-77
Surface data 4-54, 4-78
Surface winds 4-70, 4-127, 4-144
Symbols 4-17, 4-34, 4-40, 4-55, 4-57,
5-44, 7-1
Synchronization 1-21, 3-31, 3-36, 3-37
Syn Terr 2-5
Synthetic Vision v, 2-4, 2-5, 3-11, 3-19,
4-26, 4-29, 5-1, 5-37
Synthetic Vision alerts 4-29
Syn Vis 2-4
System description 1-1
System display units 3-31, 3-40
System power 1-5, 1-12, 1-14
System settings 1-20, 3-31
System status 3-43, 4-9, 4-24, 4-35, 4-44,
6-14
T
TACAN 7-1
TAF 3-76, 4-73, 4-130, 4-147
Target selection 4-47
TAS 4-31, 4-101, 5-1
TAWS alerts 4-4, 4-16, 4-17
TAWS-B 4-1, 4-10
TAWS failure alert 4-24
TAWS-SVT 4-1, 4-26
TAWS system test 4-11, 4-14, 4-24
TCA 3-11, 3-26
Temperature 1-22, 3-40, 4-57
Temperature probe 1-1, 1-2, 1-8
Temperature reference 2-29, 3-31
Terrain 1-21, 2-11, 3-1, 3-13, 3-15,
4-1, 4-5, 4-10, 4-26, 4-43, 4-94,
4-111, 7-4, A-1
Terrain alerts 4-23, 4-26, 4-29, 4-30, 5-37
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 8
Glossary
Appendix A
Index
B-7
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
Sec 5
Additional
Features
190-00601-02 Rev. K
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
V
Sec 3
MFD
Unusual attitude 2-11, 5-45
WAAS 1-8, 2-24
Warm front 4-77, 4-78
Warnings ii
WATCH 4-92, 4-109
Waypoint information 3-70, 3-72, 3-76,
5-19
Waypoint selection 3-71
Waypoint weather 3-76
Weather 3-21, 3-76, 4-52, 4-112, 4-136
Weather legend 4-53, 4-58, 4-60
Weather mapping 4-97
Weather product 3-22, 4-52, 4-55, 4-58,
4-63, 4-122, 4-138, 5-23
Weather radar 1-2, 4-1, 4-89
Weather symbols 4-55
Wind 1-21, 2-29, 3-2, 3-11, 3-13, 3-31,
3-34, 4-56, 4-57, 4-70, 4-73,
4-75, 4-127, 4-130, 4-132, 4-144,
4-147, 4-149, 4-151, 7-7
Winds aloft 4-56, 4-75, 4-132, 4-149,
4-151
Winds aloft altitude 4-133, 4-149
Sec 2
PFD
U
W
Sec 1
System
Terrain proximity ii, 1-21, 4-1, 4-5, 4-11,
7-6
Terrain scale 4-6
Terrain-SVT iv, 4-2, 4-26
Textual METARs 4-74, 4-131, 4-148
TFR 3-11, 3-25, 3-27, 4-80, 4-134, 4-150,
7-7
Thunderstorm 4-136
Thunderstorms 4-57, 4-79, 4-93, 4-97,
4-98, 4-100
Time 1-21, 3-13, 3-31, 3-38, 4-52, 4-56,
4-77, 4-78, 4-151
Time zone 3-38
TIS 4-31, 4-38, 4-40, 4-41, 4-43, 5-1
TMA 3-11, 3-26
To/From Indicator 2-19, 2-20
Topo data 3-11, 3-15
Topo scale 3-11, 3-15
Tornadoes 4-57, 4-79, 4-100
Tornados 4-136
Track indicator 2-19, 2-21
Track vector 3-2, 3-11, 3-13, 4-42
Traffic Advisory 3-24, 4-1, 4-31, 4-34,
4-38, 7-2
Traffic Pop-Up 4-37
Traffic symbols 4-40, 4-49, 5-44, 7-2
Transponder 1-11, 4-1, 4-31, 4-38, 4-41,
4-43, 4-44
Trend Vector 2-6, 2-13, 2-19, 2-21
True Airspeed 1-21, 2-6, 2-11
True North 2-20, 3-40
Turbulence 4-70, 4-88, 4-90, 4-93, 4-98,
4-126, 4-142
Turbulence Detection 4-110
Turn Rate 2-19
Turn Rate Indicator 2-19, 2-21
VDI 2-24, 5-41
Vector Duration 4-51
Vector motion 4-50
Version 1-12, 3-43, 4-11, 4-26, 5-21, A-6
Vertical deviation 2-24
Vertical scan 4-89, 4-98, 4-99, 4-103,
4-105, 4-107
Vertical speed 1-1, 1-5, 1-17, 1-21, 2-1,
2-11, 2-13, 2-18, 3-31, 3-37, 3-39
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) 1-21, 2-18
Video 3-51
VNAV 2-24, 2-28
VNV 8-7
Voice alert 4-43
Volume 1-10, 3-42, 5-25, 5-28
VOR 1-16, 2-3, 2-20, 2-22, 2-27, 3-1,
3-6, 3-11, 3-25, 3-26, 3-37, 4-12,
5-19, 7-1
VORTAC 7-1
Vspeeds 2-8, 3-33
Foreword
Terrain data 3-11, 3-16, 4-8, 4-9, A-5
Terrain obstacle symbols 4-12, 7-4
Foreword
Sec 1
System
Sec 2
PFD
Sec 3
MFD
Sec 4
Hazard
Avoidance
Wind speed 3-13
Wind vector 1-21, 2-29, 3-11, 3-13, 3-31,
3-34, 7-7
WX-500 1-9, 4-152
WX soft key 3-68
X
XM 3-41, 3-42, 4-52, 5-22
XM channel categories 5-26
XM entertainment radio 5-22
XM radio activation 5-22
XM radio channel presets 5-29
XM radio channels 5-27
XM radio volume 5-28
XM Satellite Radio 1-10, 5-22
XM troubleshooting 5-30
XM weather 3-68, 4-52
XM weather/radio 1-10
XTK 2-22
Zero pitch line 5-41
Index
Appendix A
Sec 8
Glossary
Sec 7
Symbols
Sec 6
Annun.
& Alerts
Sec 5
Additional
Features
Z
B-8
Garmin G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide
190-00601-02 Rev. K
www.garmin.com
Part Number 190-00601-02 Rev. K
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising